JP7381060B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won on the condition that a game ball enters a starter opening that can be opened and closed. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the jackpot determination result. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in the variable display of the special symbols, a jackpot game involving opening of a jackpot that can be opened and closed is executed (see Patent Document 1).

In the gaming machine according to Patent Document 1, after a jackpot game is executed, the opening/closable starting port may enter a time-saving state in which it is easier to open than the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state).

JP 2018-88993 Publication

However, there is still room for improvement in terms of gaming machines that can be put into a gaming state in which the openable/closable starting port is easier to open than in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state) in order to improve gaming enjoyment.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A predetermined determination is made, and when a first result is derived from the predetermined determination, an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed, while a second result different from the first result is derived from the predetermined determination. and a game control means that does not execute the advantageous game,
Based on the result of the predetermined determination, it is possible to perform a variable display of the effect pattern on the display section, and when the first result is derived, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in the first result display mode, and the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in the first result display mode, and A gaming machine comprising: a performance control means that may stop displaying the performance symbols in a second result display mode when a second result is derived;
The second result includes a second normal result and a second special result,
The game control means is
The predetermined determination can be performed on the condition that the game ball enters a starting area provided in the gaming area,
Regarding the ease of opening of the openable/closable variable starting area constituting the starting area, it is possible to create a second opening/closing game state in which the variable starting area is easier to open than the normal first opening/closing gaming state,
Regarding the probability that the first result is derived in the predetermined determination, it is possible to set a second probability game state in which the first result is more likely to be derived than a normal first probability game state,
When the second normal result is derived in the first open/close game state and the first probability game state, the first open/close game state is not changed to the second open/close game state; 2. When the special result is derived, the first open/close game state is changed to the second open/close game state,
If the second normal result is derived and the second special result is derived in the first open/close gaming state and the second probability gaming state, from the first open/close gaming state. without entering the second opening/closing gaming state;
The second result display mode includes a non-specific second result display mode that suggests that the first open/close gaming state does not change to the second open/close gaming state, and a non-specific second result display mode that indicates that the second open/close gaming state does not change from the first open/close gaming state to the second open/close gaming state. There is a specific second result display mode that suggests that
The performance control means is
The same production mode may be set in the case of the first open/closed gaming state and the first probability gaming state and the case of the first open/closed gaming state and the second probability gaming state,
When the second normal result is derived in the first open/close game state and the first probability game state in the same performance mode , the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-specific second result display mode. On the other hand, when the second special result is derived, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in the specific second result display mode,
When the second normal result is derived and when the second special result is derived in the first opening/closing gaming state and the second probability gaming state in the same production mode , the production pattern is characterized in that it is stopped and displayed in the non-specific second result display mode.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. This is a first look-ahead determination table. This is a second look-ahead determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold performance. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. (A) is the special pattern 1 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is the special pattern 2 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is the losing pattern according to the first embodiment. This is a type determination table. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a time-saving state according to the first embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the first embodiment. . (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state according to the first embodiment. be. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time saving small winning symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, (B) is a gaming state setting table for time saving small winning symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, ( C) is a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, and (D) is a game state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the first embodiment. It is a small winning game control table according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart of special operation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 1 judgment processing concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 2 judgment processing concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a state in which a performance is performed in a time-saving performance mode according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how an effect is performed in the super chance mode according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a performance is performed in a short chance mode according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a game flow according to the first embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table according to the second embodiment, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment. be. It is a diagram showing a game flow according to a second embodiment. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C according to the third embodiment. be. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fourth embodiment, (B) is a jackpot game control table according to the fourth embodiment, and (C) is a game state according to the fourth embodiment. This is a settings table. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time saving small winning symbol stop display according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a gaming state setting table for small winning symbol stop display other than non-time saving according to the fourth embodiment. , (C) is a game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display according to the fourth embodiment, and (D) is a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the game flow concerning a 4th embodiment. (A) is a game state setting table for low probability non-time saving small winning symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a gaming state setting table for high probability non time saving small winning symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment. (C) is a game state setting table for time-saving small hit symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment, and (D) is a game state setting table for low probability non-time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment. (E) is a gaming state setting table for high probability non-time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment, and (F) is a gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment. It is. (A) is a hit determination table according to the fifth embodiment, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the fifth embodiment, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table according to the fifth embodiment. be. It is a figure showing the game flow concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board unit concerning a 6th embodiment. It is an auxiliary game control table according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a special pattern 1 jackpot determination table according to the sixth embodiment, (B) is a special pattern 2 jackpot determination table according to the sixth embodiment, and (C) is a losing pattern according to the sixth embodiment. This is a type determination table. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving state according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a time-saving state according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the sixth embodiment. . (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state according to the sixth embodiment. be. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a game state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special operation processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 1 judgment processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern judgment processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment, and is a continuation of FIG. 84. It is a flowchart of special symbol determination processing according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing the game flow concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a losing symbol type determination table according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the seventh embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state according to the seventh embodiment. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time saving state according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the seventh embodiment, and (B) is a game state setting table for low-probability time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern judgment processing concerning a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process after displaying a losing symbol according to a seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing the game flow concerning a 7th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a state in which an additional effect of the remaining number of time reductions is performed. It is a small winning symbol type determination table according to the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 1 judgment processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special operation processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a diagram showing how a performance related to a small winning game is being performed.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY1 approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY1, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY1 from the player facing the pachinko machine PY1. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through the transparent plate 23t.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) to cause the game ball to fire. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 40k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left and right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right side decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 41k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decoration body 32 to the front right part of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decoration body 33 to the front left part of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game ball enters the big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (one in the first embodiment) of the game ball is paid out as a prize ball. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) regarding games that can earn gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 that controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and allows ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball, and is included in the shooting device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the release control circuit 175.

Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 40k and the second performance button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 40a and a second performance button sensor 41a. The first performance button sensor 40a detects that the first performance button 40k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 41a detects that the second performance button 41k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 40a and the second performance button sensor 41a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detected content.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the performance control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing fluctuation start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is released.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting hole 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a series of games such as variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 checks the acquired special symbol random number against the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.''

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. The contents of L Reach's production include videos of scenes different from the matches related to SP Reach, which will be described later, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn special moves.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is sometimes collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is sometimes collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure-related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY1 then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY1 can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the sixth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. Note that instead of installing all of these three types of specific gaming states in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it is also possible to install some of the three types of specific gaming states.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state. A state in which the ease of opening (the ease of opening the second starting port 12) is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "time saving state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is defined as "non-time saving". "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, the elements that make up the ease of opening in the time-saving state include the probability of winning in the hit determination (probability of winning), the regular figure fluctuation time, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game. . In the time-saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time-saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to easily win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability, low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the number of prize balls for one winning is greater than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the normal gaming state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a specific gaming state Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 30.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, the setting screen G101 can be made not to be displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure fluctuation display starts for the first time after the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first stage before the reach occurs, and the second stage after the reach is established in the case where a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability high base gaming state" and indicates the time-saving state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

The time saving production mode is set in a low probability high base gaming state and a high probability high base gaming state, and is either a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability high base gaming state, and is at least a time saving state. You can also set it to a production mode that shows that.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 40, and a second presentation button device 41 is used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G115. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 20(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and then as shown in FIG. 20(D). As shown, the right performance symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(E), the middle performance symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction.

Finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state lined up horizontally at approximately the vertical center position, completely stop all at once, as shown in FIG. 20(F), and the stop is stopped. Confirmed (stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the temporarily stopped production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 completely stop at random, that is, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are replaced by the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. They all stop at the same random number, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the effect patterns are temporarily stopped in the order of left effect pattern EZ1 → right effect pattern EZ3 → middle effect pattern EZ2, but they are temporarily stopped. The mode is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbol starts from a state where the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the left effect pattern EZ1 related to the number "5" temporarily stops at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 21(C), and then as shown in FIG. 21(D). As such, the right performance symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3, but the mode of temporary stopping is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. I can do it. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Furthermore, the temporary stopping position is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily stop at approximately the center position in the vertical direction from the state where reach is established. Then, a stop display of the effect symbol indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the temporarily stopped production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 However, they stop all at once at the same loss eyes that are unique to the same reach-to-reach loss as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol variation performance does not end at N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium performance symbol EZ2 that has not stopped will fluctuate at high speed again, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, Thule related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl comes. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After that, as shown in Figure 24 (B-1), the protagonist character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed. After the smiling girl is displayed close-up, as shown in Figure 24 (B-1). As shown, the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character will be displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, it consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in a baseball game from the standpoint of a pitcher and a batter.

When the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and bat approach each other, and a scene appears where the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a performance suggesting a jackpot. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 40k, the second performance button 41k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and this first effect button With the occurrence of the valid operation period, as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (first performance button operation promotion performance) that prompts the operation of the first performance button 40k is performed.

In the first performance button operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing operation image) G12b, and an image representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (first effect button operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k (first effect button operation valid period remaining time image) G12c. .

The remaining time image G12c of the first effect button operation valid period is made up of a roughly curved progress bar, so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period as time passes. Changes to Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the first effect button operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the first effect button operation valid time has passed.

Then, when the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the first production button operation valid period, or after the first production button 40k is pressed, or the first production button After the first performance button 40k is not operated during the operation validity period and the remaining time of the first performance button operation validity period runs out, the operation result performance is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result presentation. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the first production button operation validity period, or the first production button Even if 40k is not pressed and the remaining time of the performance button operation valid period runs out, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for special figure 1 pending or special figure 2 hold for which a jackpot determination has not been made, based on the result of the look-ahead determination, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Furthermore, the variable display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. The icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed in the variable display area 50e. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the change display area 50e is different from the object shown by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. is not included, but since there is a relationship between the display of the pending icon and the display of the icon, in the following, the display of the pending icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "pending effect". . Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the pending display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly indicated by broken lines, but these are the pending display area 50d, This is described to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the variable display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned variable display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 that was displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is moved to the corresponding variable display area 50e (not shown). Move to the illustrated first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the variable display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the variable display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

Note that when changing from a pending icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the pending display area 50d to the variable display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending notice is given, the player can expect that he may win a jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of the suspension notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

One type of reservation notice is a reservation notice that enters a special mode immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, a reservation notice is given when special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning at the first starting gate 11). There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is completely stationary, the display position does not move, but it remains in place. It may also be configured so that it shakes slightly.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (the hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 29, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, a reservation icon change notice is given when the special figure 1 reservation is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 moved to the corresponding variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation notice, so that the degree of jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from the execution until the special symbol change display starts, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, there is also a stoppage of the production pattern. It is also possible to use a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or a variable display of performance symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed. The power-on processing includes permission settings for access to the gaming RAM 104, settings for the gaming CPU 102, SIO (System Input/Output), PIO (Parallel Input/Output), and CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: interrupt time management). settings etc. of the circuit for

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) The process of updating counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while interrupts are disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after interrupts are enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the end of S005), this is performed both during the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("2" in the first embodiment) corresponding to the prize entered into the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the first embodiment) corresponding to the prize entered into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the first embodiment, the prescribed number of winning prizes is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the big winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("9" in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the big winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, the special figure 2 related judgment information is not stored. It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol waiting process.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the set special figure 1 variation start command includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, there is one or more stored special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b to Special figure 2 pending storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth pending item (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the first embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variation display of the special symbol is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( A normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include a special figure variation performance, a jackpot game performance (jackpot opening performance, round performance, jackpot ending performance), customer waiting performance, operation performance, and pre-reading performance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the production control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image production, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 10ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the production control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process to analyze the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the first embodiment below.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to a pending notice in which a pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing a prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (execute a pre-read effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process advances to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage section 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach/loss variation, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for determining the special pattern variation performance pattern with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table in the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. Data representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern thus obtained is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using the images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using the sound output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using the light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance content of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes the special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variable display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs customer waiting performance standby processing. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on the timer. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, whereas if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the production control microcomputer 121 executes the jackpot with the start of the opening of the jackpot game. Opening performance start processing is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command, and based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening production according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is to be executed, select the performance content (jackpot opening performance pattern) of the jackpot opening performance, and output a jackpot opening performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set in buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the number of rounds designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the number of rounds designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round production according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round production. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbols indicated by the jackpot ending command are jackpot symbols A, B, or jackpot symbols D, E, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the performance control mode to a probability variable performance mode that suggests a high probability high base game state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a time-saving performance mode that suggests a low probability high base gaming state when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol C or the jackpot symbol F. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

First, the main features of the first embodiment will be explained from the perspective of gameplay. In the basic embodiment, either a "big hit" or a "loss" is determined in the jackpot determination, but in the first embodiment, a "small win" is determined in addition to a "big hit" or a "loss". Sometimes it is done. In other words, in the first embodiment, a "small win" that was not determined in the jackpot determination in the basic embodiment is provided.

The details will be described later, but if a "small hit" is determined as a result of the jackpot determination, the special pattern fluctuation pattern will be determined in the same way as when it is determined to be a "big hit" and "loss". Then, a special figure variable display is performed based on the special figure variation pattern. In the special figure variable display, the "small winning symbol" which indicates that the player has won the "small winning" is finally displayed in a stopped state. That is, in the special figure variable display, a "small hit" is derived as a jackpot determination result. Then, when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, a small winning game is executed.

In the small winning game, the large prize opening 14 is opened. That is, the small winning game is a game that involves opening the large prize opening 14. A gaming state in which a small winning game is being played is sometimes referred to as a "small winning gaming state." In the small winning game state, the large winning hole 14 with a larger number of prize balls opens compared to the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12, so the small winning game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It can also be positioned as a gaming state. In addition, in the small winning game state, execution of the special figure variable display is regulated, specifically prohibited. Then, when the small winning game state ends, it becomes possible to start a new special figure variable display. Details of the small winning game state will be described later.

Further, in the basic embodiment, a non-time saving state and a time saving state are provided as gaming states related to the ease of opening (easiness of opening) of the second starting port 12, and it is relatively easy for the player to The advantageous time-saving state was set in response to winning a jackpot and ending the jackpot gaming state. That is, the end of the jackpot game state (jackpot winning or stop display of jackpot symbols) is set as the trigger for the occurrence of the time saving state. However, in the first embodiment, in addition to the end of the jackpot game state, a stop display of a small winning symbol or a stop display of a losing symbol is provided as a trigger for setting the time saving state.

In the first embodiment, only one type of small winning symbol is provided, so when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is always set in accordance with the stopped display. On the other hand, there are four types of losing symbols: losing symbol A, losing symbol B, losing symbol C, and losing symbol D. Time is saved depending on the stop display of losing symbol B or the stop display of losing symbol C. The state is set.

In this way, the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C, so the small winning symbol, the losing symbol B, and the losing symbol C are It can be positioned as a special symbol that can set a time saving state.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a jackpot determination based on winning in the first starting hole 11, in other words, a "small hit" may be determined only in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 1 variable display, and the second starting hole In the jackpot determination based on winning in the mouth 12, in other words, in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 variable display, a "small hit" is not determined. Further, the losing symbol that can set the time saving state is determined only when the jackpot determination based on the winning in the first starting opening 11 is determined as a "losing" symbol. Therefore, basically, in a situation where the player is hitting the left hand aiming to win the first starting opening 11 in a non-time saving state, the time saving state can be generated regardless of the jackpot gaming state.

Next, various tables used by the game control microcomputer 101 for game control, tables that are different from the basic embodiment, and tables that are not used in the basic embodiment will be explained. Tables different from the basic embodiment are the jackpot determination table, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Tables that were not used in the basic embodiment include a losing symbol type determination table, a gaming state setting table related to the stop display of small winning symbols, a small winning game control table, and a gaming state setting related to the stopping display of losing symbols. There's a table.

First, the jackpot determination table will be explained. In the first embodiment, the jackpot determination is performed when the special figure 1 variable display is performed based on the winning in the first starting opening 11, and the jackpot determination is performed when the special drawing 2 variable display is performed based on the winning in the second starting opening 12. Different jackpot judgment tables are used for jackpot judgment. Hereinafter, the former will be referred to as the "Special Figure 1 Jackpot Determination Table" and the latter will be referred to as the "Special Figure 2 Jackpot Determination Table." In addition, below, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 1 variable display will be referred to as the "special figure 1 jackpot determination." In addition, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 2 variable display is referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot determination."

FIG. 48(A) is an example of the configuration of the special pattern 1 jackpot determination table, and FIG. 48(B) is a configuration example of the special pattern 2 jackpot determination table. Both the special figure 1 jackpot determination table and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table include a table used in the normal probability state and a table used in the high probability state, as in the basic embodiment. That is, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table includes a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for normal probability state and a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for high probability state, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table includes a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for normal probability state. There is a special figure 2 jackpot determination table for use and a special figure 2 jackpot determination table for high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 48(A), in each special figure 1 jackpot judgment table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is appropriately set for each of the jackpot judgment results, ie, jackpot, small hit, and loss. are divided into. Therefore, when a jackpot determination is made using each special figure 1 jackpot determination table, it is determined to be a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48(B), in each special figure 2 jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values are appropriately distributed to each of the jackpot determination results, ie, jackpot and loss. Therefore, when a jackpot determination is made in each special figure 2 jackpot determination table, it is determined to be either a jackpot or a loss, but it is not determined to be a small hit.

Next, the losing symbol type determination table will be explained. As described above, in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of losing symbols are provided. In the following, the type of losing symbol will be referred to as a "losing symbol type." The loss symbol type determination table is a table for determining the loss symbol type when the result of jackpot determination is a loss. Similar to the jackpot symbol type determination table, the losing symbol type determination table also includes a losing symbol type determining table (special symbol 1 losing symbol type determination table) used when performing the special symbol 1 variable display, and a special symbol 2 variable display. There is a losing symbol type determination table (special figure 2 losing symbol type determining table) used when performing. Note that, hereinafter, determining the losing symbol type using the losing symbol type determination table will be referred to as "losing symbol type determination". Furthermore, determining the losing symbol type using the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination table is referred to as "special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination," and determining the losing symbol type using the special symbol 2 losing symbol type determination table. This process is called "Special Figure 2 Loss Symbol Type Judgment".

Here, the losing symbol type determination will be explained. Similar to the jackpot symbol type determination, the losing symbol type determination is also performed by comparing the random number for jackpot symbol type determination with the losing symbol type determination table. That is, a common random number is used in the jackpot symbol type determination and the loss symbol type determination. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the "random number for jackpot symbol type determination" described in the basic embodiment is referred to as "random number for symbol type determination".

In the first embodiment, three types of losing symbols, namely losing symbols A, losing symbols B, and C, are provided as losing symbols related to the special pattern 1, and one of the losing symbols D is provided as a losing symbol related to the special pattern 2. There are different types of losing patterns. Then, as shown in FIG. 48(C), in each losing symbol type determination table, a symbol type random number is determined for each losing symbol type so that the selection rate for each losing symbol type is as shown in FIG. 48(C). Values (symbol type random number determination values) are appropriately distributed.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table will be explained. In the basic embodiment, each of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table was associated with the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for non-time-saving states, a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for time-saving states, and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table. There were a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving states and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time-saving states. In the first embodiment, the basic structure of the special figure variation pattern determination table is the same, but the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state is further divided. Specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state is associated with the trigger of the time-saving state, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state after the jackpot game state (first time-saving state (Special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the second time-saving state) and special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the time-saving state after the small winning symbol stop display and after the loss symbol B stop display (Special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the second time-saving state) table), and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state after the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state).

Here, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state and the trigger of the gaming state will be explained. FIG. 49(A) is an example of the configuration of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 49(B) is an example of the configuration of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state, and FIG. A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 50(B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state, and FIG. ) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and FIG. 51(B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 49(A) and 49(B), the jackpot determination results are included in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving states and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time-saving states. In addition to the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when it is a jackpot and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is a loss, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is a small hit. Also includes a table. This is because, as described above, in the first embodiment, a "small hit" is included in the determination result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is a loss includes the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for the loss pattern A (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for the loss pattern A), and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for the loss pattern A. Special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in case of symbol B (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol B) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in case of losing symbol C (special symbol 1 variation pattern for losing symbol C) judgment table). This is because, as mentioned above, in the first embodiment, there are multiple types of losing symbols, and depending on the type of losing symbol, a time-saving state advantageous to the player occurs after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. This is to secure a certain amount of special figure variation time and to reliably execute the special figure variation performance that increases the player's expectations. Therefore, the reach determination result is not associated with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol B and the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol C, and as in the case of a jackpot, the special symbol 1 variation As a pattern determination result, the special figure 1 variation pattern in which the special figure variation performance ends with normal variation is not included. On the other hand, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss pattern A is associated with reach determination results, and similar to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss for non-time saving states in the basic embodiment, Furthermore, there is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbols A when there is a reach, and a special symbol 1 varying pattern determination table for losing symbols A when there is no reach.

Next, a gaming state setting table for newly setting (changing) a gaming state will be explained. In the basic embodiment, when a new gaming state is set (changed) in response to the end of a jackpot gaming state, the game state is set based on the gaming state setting table associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot gaming state. The gaming state has been newly set (changed). In the first embodiment, the same applies when the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stopped display of a small winning symbol, and when the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stopped display of a losing symbol, basically, The gaming state is newly set (changed) based on the gaming state setting table.

When the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, the game state setting table includes the small winning symbol stop display when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state. (game state setting table for non-time saving small winning symbol stop display) and gaming state setting table for small winning symbol stop display when the small winning symbol is stopped displaying in the time saving state (game state setting table for small winning symbol stop display) There is a game state setting table for displaying winning symbols. That is, the gaming state is associated with the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of small winning symbols.

FIG. 52(A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display, and FIG. 52(B) is a configuration example of a gaming state setting table for time-saving small winning symbol stop display. As shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B), according to the game state setting table for non-time saving small winning symbol stop display, the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, but According to the game state setting table for stopping display of winning symbols, the time saving state is not set in response to the stopping display of small winning symbols.

In addition, when the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stop display of a losing symbol, the gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for displaying a losing symbol stop) includes a stop display of a losing symbol in a non-time saving state. A gaming state setting table for displaying a losing pattern stop when a loss symbol is displayed (a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display) and a gaming state setting table for displaying a losing symbol stop display when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed in a time-saving state. There is a gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display). FIG. 52(C) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display, and FIG. 52(D) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display. That is, the gaming state is associated with the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols.

Furthermore, the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display includes a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display in the case of losing symbol B (gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol B stop display), There is a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display when it is a losing symbol C (gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol C stop display), and the gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display. , a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display when the losing symbol is B (gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display), and a gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display when the losing symbol is C. (Game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol C stop display). That is, in the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols, the gaming state and the losing symbol type are associated.

As shown in FIGS. 52(C) and 52(D), according to the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol B stop display and the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol C stop display, the stopping of losing symbol B The time saving state is set according to the display and losing symbol C, but according to the game state setting table for time saving losing symbol B stop display and the gaming state setting table for time saving losing symbol C stop display, the stop display of losing symbol B and The time saving state is not set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol C.

In this way, the jackpot determination result is associated with the gaming state setting table for newly setting (changing) the gaming state. The gaming state setting table relating to the small win and the gaming state setting table relating to the loss are associated with the gaming state when the special figure stop display is performed. Further, symbol types are associated with the gaming state setting table relating to jackpots and the gaming state setting table relating to losses.

In addition, the conditions for ending the time-saving state when the time-saving state is set in response to the stop display of the small winning symbol, and the end conditions for the time-saving state when the time-saving state is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol B. is set to "Special figure variable display 150 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 150 times without winning a jackpot, and the state becomes a non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol C, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special pattern variable display 50 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot, and the state becomes a non-time-saving gaming state.

Next, the small winning game control table will be explained. The small winning game control table is a table used to control a small winning game in which a small winning game is played. Small winning games include an opening game that involves opening and closing the big prize opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the small winning game until the start of the first opening game, and an opening game in the final round. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the game until the end of the small winning game. Each open game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous open game, and ends with the start of the next open game or the start of the ending. Furthermore, the period from the start of the opening to the end of the ending with the open game in between constitutes a small winning game.

FIG. 53 shows a configuration example of the small winning game control table. The small winning game control table stores elements constituting the small winning game (small winning game constituent elements). The small winning game components include the number of opening games, the opening time of the big prize opening for each opening game (opening pattern), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time), etc. There is. In addition, when there are multiple types of small winning games, it is possible to set small winning game components for each type of small winning games.

According to the small winning game control table, the open game is played once. In the first embodiment, the big prize opening 14 is opened for 1.8 seconds in the open game. Further, from the start of the small winning game until the start of the first opening game, an opening is performed in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 2.0 seconds. Furthermore, an ending is performed in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 0.5 seconds from the end of the last open game until the end of the small winning game.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 that differs from the basic embodiment and processing that was not performed in the basic embodiment will be described. Processing that differs from the basic embodiment is special movement processing, special pattern 1 judgment processing of special symbol standby processing in special movement processing, special pattern 1 variation pattern judgment processing, special pattern 2 judgment processing, and special pattern 2 variation pattern. These are the determination process and the special symbol confirmation process in the special operation process. On the other hand, as processes that are not performed in the basic embodiment, there are a game state setting process after displaying small winning symbols, a small winning game control process, and a gaming state setting process after displaying losing symbols in the special operation process.

First, special operation processing will be explained. Special operation processing according to the first embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special operation process is shown in FIG. In the special operation process according to the first embodiment, the process regarding the special figure display 81, special figure pending display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into eight statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8" is assigned to each of these statuses.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process after jackpot game (S1506) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "6", After the small winning symbol is displayed, the game status setting process (S1507) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "7", the small winning game control process (S1508) is performed, and the "special operation status" is set to "8". If so, a game state setting process (S1509) is performed after losing symbols are displayed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The "special symbol fluctuation processing", "jackpot game control processing", and "game state setting processing after jackpot gaming state" according to the first embodiment are the same as the "special symbol fluctuation processing", "jackpot game control processing" according to the basic embodiment. The processing contents are the same as "control processing" and "gaming state setting processing". Note that the process related to "special operation status = 5" is "gaming state setting process after jackpot game", and although the name is different from the name in the basic embodiment, this is a process in which the gaming state is changed to a new state in the first embodiment. This is because the name was changed in response to an increase in the number of opportunities to set (change) ``special operation status = 5'', and the processing contents for ``special operation status = 5'' are generally the same. In addition, in the "special symbol standby process" according to the first embodiment, "special symbol 1 determination process", "special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process", "special symbol 2 determination process", and "special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process" ”, and “special symbol confirmation processing” are “special symbol 1 determination processing”, “special symbol 1 variation pattern determination processing”, and “special symbol 2 determination processing” in “special symbol standby processing” according to the basic embodiment. , "Special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process", and "Special symbol confirmation process" are different in processing content. Details of these processes will be described later.

The game state setting process after small winning symbol display (S1507) is a process for newly setting (changing) the gaming state when the small winning symbol is determined after the stop display of the small winning symbol ends.

The small winning game control process (S1508) is a process performed in the small winning game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a small winning game control process, thereby performing a small winning game according to the small winning game control table. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "7", and indicates that the state in which the small winning game is controlled is the "jackpot game state" and the special operation status "4" is set. This is called "Small winning game state".

The game state setting process after losing symbol stop display (S1509) is performed when the losing symbol B and the losing symbol C are finalized after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the losing symbol C are completed in the non-time saving state. This is the process of setting the gaming state.

Although the details will be described later, the "special operation status" is changed to "6" in the special symbol confirmation process when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the "special operation status" is changed to "8" in the special symbol confirmation process when the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed and when the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the game state setting process ends after the small winning symbol is displayed, the "special operation status" is changed to "7", and when the game state setting process ends after the losing symbol stops, the "special operation status" is changed to "7". It is changed to "1". Furthermore, when the small winning game control process ends, the "special operation status" is changed to "1".

Next, the special symbol 1 determination process and the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process will be explained. First, the special figure 1 determination process will be explained. FIG. 55 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure 1 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines, as step S1621, whether the current gaming state related to the jackpot probability is the normal probability state. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1622, it selects the special chart 1 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state, while determining that it is not in the normal probability state, that is, in the high probability state. Then, in step S1623, the special chart 1 jackpot determination table for high probability state is selected.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special pattern 1 jackpot determination table, in step S1624, it performs the special pattern 1 jackpot determination based on the selected special pattern 1 jackpot determination table. In the special pattern 1 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special pattern 1 reservation storage section 105a, and determines the selected special pattern 1 jackpot. It is checked against the table to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

In step S1625, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special drawing 1 jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot, it selects the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type determination table in step S1626, and performs the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type determination in step S1627.

When determining the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special pattern 1 reservation storage section 105a, and selects the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which jackpot symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special drawing 1 jackpot symbol type determination, in step S1628, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1629, A symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type as a result of the determination is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1625 that it is not a jackpot, it determines in step S1630 whether or not the result of the special drawing 1 jackpot determination is a small win. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small win, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the small win symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 in step S1631, and issues a symbol designation command indicating the small win symbol in step S1632. is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a small hit in step S1630, it selects the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination table in step S1633, and performs the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination in step S1634.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special pattern 1 reservation storage section 105a to determine the special pattern 1 losing pattern. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which losing symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination, in step S1635, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1636, A symbol designation command indicating a losing symbol type as a result of the determination is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 56 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure 1 pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1641 whether the game state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 is currently a non-time saving state. Determine whether or not. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in a non-time saving state, in step S1642, it selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, while determining that it is not in a non-time saving state, that is, in a time saving state. Then, in step S1643, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1644.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like in step S1644, and determines whether or not the special pattern 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1645, the game control microcomputer 101 selects a jackpot for the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643. Select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special pattern 1 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, it checks the symbol type flag etc. in step S1645 and determines whether the special pattern 1 jackpot determination result is a small hit or not. Determine. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a small hit, in step S1647, the game control microcomputer 101 selects a small hit from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643. Select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for use, and proceed to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special pattern 1 jackpot determination result is not a small hit, it checks the symbol type flag etc. in step S1648, and confirms that the result of the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination is a losing symbol A. Determine whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination is the losing symbol A, it performs reach determination in step S1649. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and uses the reach random number as the current gaming state (non-time saving). It is determined whether there is a reach or there is no reach by comparing it with a reach determination table according to the state (state/time saving state).

In step S1650, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the result of the reach determination is "with reach". If the result of the reach determination is that there is a reach, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the losing symbol A with the reach in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 in step S1651. After selecting the relevant special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, the process proceeds to step S1656, and if the result of the reach determination is not a reach, the current number of reserved special figures 1 is checked in step S1652, and the process is performed in step S1642 or step S1643. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the no-reach losing pattern A corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 from among the special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables selected in any of the above, the process advances to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1648 that the result of the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination is not the losing symbol A, in step S1653, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag etc. and determines the special symbol 1 losing symbol type. It is determined whether the result is a losing symbol B or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination is the losing symbol B, in step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol B, the process proceeds to step S1656, and if it is determined that the result of the special symbol 1 losing symbol type determination is not losing symbol B, in step S1655, losing symbol C is selected. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for use, the process advances to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in steps S1645, S1647, S1651, S1652, S1654, and S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table based on the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in step S1656. Performs fluctuation pattern judgment. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a, and selects the special figure variation pattern. The pattern random number is compared with the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern.

Subsequently, in step S1657, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer, and in step S1658, sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special symbol 2 determination process and the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process will be explained. First, the special figure 2 determination process will be explained. FIG. 57 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process. As shown in FIG. 57, in the special figure 2 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1661 whether or not the current gaming state related to the jackpot probability is the normal probability state. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the normal probability state, it selects the special chart 2 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state in step S1662, while determining that it is not in the normal probability state, that is, in the high probability state. Then, in step S1663, the special chart 2 jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special pattern 2 jackpot determination table, in step S1664, it performs the special pattern 2 jackpot determination based on the selected special pattern 2 jackpot determination table. In the special pattern 2 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special pattern random number stored in the special pattern 2 reservation storage section 105b, and determines the selected special pattern 2 jackpot. Check it against the table and determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

In step S1665, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special drawing 2 jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot, it selects the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol type determination table in step S1666, and performs the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol type determination in step S1667.

When determining the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol type, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored random number of the pattern type stored in the special pattern 2 reservation storage section 105b, and determines the special pattern 2 jackpot pattern. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which jackpot symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination, in step S1668, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1669, A symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type as a result of the determination is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1665 that it is not a jackpot, that is, it is a loss, it selects the special pattern 2 losing symbol type determination table in step S1670, and selects the special pattern 2 losing symbol type determination table in step S1671. conduct.

In the special pattern 2 losing symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special pattern 2 pending storage section 105b, and selects the special pattern 2 losing symbol. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which losing symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination, in step S1672, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1673, A symbol designation command indicating a losing symbol type as a result of the determination is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process. As described above, in the first embodiment, only one type of losing symbol D is provided as the losing symbol type related to the special figure 2.

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 58 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process. As shown in FIG. 58, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1681 whether the game state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 is currently a non-time saving state. Determine whether or not. If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time saving state, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state in step S1682, and proceeds to step S1689.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1681 that the time saving state is not a non-time saving state, that is, the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the type of the time saving flag described later in step S1683, and confirms that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game. Determine whether the state is the same or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is a time saving state after a jackpot game, in step S1684, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state and proceeds to step S1689.

If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1683 that the time-saving state is not after the jackpot game state, it checks the type of the time-saving flag in step S1685, and confirms that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the small winning symbol stop display. Determine whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the small winning symbol stop display, in step S1686, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and in step S1689 Proceed to.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is not the time saving state after the small winning symbol stop display, it checks the type of the time saving flag in step S1687, and the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is not the time saving state after the small winning symbol stop display. Determine whether or not it is in a time saving state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed, it selects the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state in step S1686, and executes step S1686. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to S1689, if it is determined that the time-saving state is not after the losing symbol B stop display, the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state is selected in step S1688, and the process proceeds to step S1689.

In step S1689, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like to determine whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1690, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the following in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1682, S1684, S1686, and S1688. Select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for jackpot. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, that is, a loss, it performs reach determination in step S1691. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b, and uses that reach random number as the current gaming state (non-time saving). It is determined whether there is a reach or there is no reach by comparing it with a reach determination table according to the state (state/time saving state).

In step S1692, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the result of the reach determination is "with reach". If the result of the reach determination is that there is a reach, the game control microcomputer 101 determines, in step S1693, that there is a loss with a reach in the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1682, S1684, S1686, or S1688. After selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the game, the process proceeds to step S1695, and if the result of the reach determination is that there is no reach, the current number of reserved special figures 2 is checked in step S1694, and the process proceeds to steps S1682 and S1684. , S1686, S1688, the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for no reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 2 is selected, and then the process proceeds to step S1695.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in steps S1690, S1693, and S1694, in step S1695, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 variation pattern determination based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. . In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, and selects the special figure variation pattern. The pattern random number is compared with the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure 2 variation pattern.

Subsequently, in step S1696, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern in the output buffer, and in step S1697, sets the special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special symbol confirmation process will be explained. FIG. 59 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special symbol confirmation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1751 whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol and confirm the special symbol. It is determined whether the special figure confirmation time set in the operation timer has elapsed. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol confirmation time has not elapsed, it ends the special symbol confirmation process. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed, it determines in step S1752 whether or not it is currently in the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF).

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not currently in the normal probability state, it proceeds to step S1757, and if it determines that it is currently in the normal probability state, it determines whether or not it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON) in step S1753. Determine whether If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not in a time saving state, the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it determines that it is currently in a time saving state, it subtracts "1" from the value of the remaining time saving counter in step S1754, and in step S1755. , it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is "0" or not. When the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0", it proceeds to step S1757, and the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0". If it is determined that, in step S1756, the time saving state is shifted to a non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned OFF), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

In step S1757, the gaming control microcomputer 101 checks the current gaming state, sets a gaming state command indicating the gaming state in the output buffer, and in step S1758, the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the symbol is a jackpot, it resets the game state (sets the normal game state) in step S1759. Specifically, it turns off the high probability flag and the time-saving flag, and sets the remaining time-saving number. (set the counter value to 0).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process in step S1760, changes the special operation status to "4" in step S1761, and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is being stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol, it determines in step S1762 whether or not the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol. judge. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the symbol is a small winning symbol, it changes the special operation status to "6" in step S1763, and ends the special symbol confirmation process.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 that the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is not a small winning symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol B or a losing symbol C in step S1764. Determine whether it exists or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a losing symbol B or a losing symbol C, it changes the special operation status to "8" in step S1766 and ends the special symbol confirmation process, while at the same time changing the special operation status to "8" and ending the special symbol confirmation process. If it is determined that it is not a losing symbol C, the special operation status is changed to "1" in step S1765, and the special symbol confirmation process is ended.

Here, the game state setting process after displaying small winning symbols (S1507) and the game state setting process after displaying losing symbols (S1509) will be explained. First, the game state setting process after displaying small winning symbols (S1507) will be explained. As described above, when the special operation status is "6", the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after the small winning symbol is displayed. Since the game control microcomputer 101 plays the game in the time-saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, in the game state setting process after the small winning symbol is displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol. A game state indicating that the time saving flag (time saving flag after small winning symbol display) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol. The command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Furthermore, since the condition for ending the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150", "150" times is set as the prescribed number of time saving times in the remaining time saving number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "7" and ends the game state setting process after displaying the small winning symbol.

Next, the game state setting process after losing symbol display (S1509) will be explained. As described above, when the special operation status is "8", the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying a losing symbol. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving state based on the losing symbol type in the gaming state setting process after displaying a losing symbol. Specifically, if the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving flag (a time saving flag after the losing symbol B is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B. flag) in the time-saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time-saving state, and also set a gaming state command indicating that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. do. Furthermore, since the condition for ending the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150", "150" times is set as the prescribed number of time saving times in the remaining time saving number counter. On the other hand, if the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving flag (time saving flag after losing symbol C is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stopping display of the losing symbol C. is turned on in a time-saving flag area of a gaming RAM 104 to set a time-saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of a losing symbol C is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, since the condition for ending the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50" times, "50" times is set as the specified number of time saving times in the remaining time saving number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "1" and ends the game state setting process after displaying the losing symbol.

In addition, when setting the time saving state in the game state setting process after the jackpot game (S1505), the game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving flag (jackpot gaming state) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the jackpot gaming state. At the same time, the time saving state is set by turning on the time saving flag) in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104, and a gaming state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the jackpot gaming state is sent to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. set. In addition, if the expected number of time savings is set as an end condition for the time saving state, that is, if the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game state related to jackpot symbols C and F, the end conditions of the time saving state are Since the number of executions of the variable diagram display is "100", "100" is set as the specified time saving number in the time saving remaining number counter.

In this way, in the game state setting process after jackpot game (S1505), the game state setting process after small winning symbol display (S1507), and the game state setting process after loss symbol display (S1509), as a time saving flag indicating the time saving state, Since the time saving flag after the jackpot game state, the time saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol, the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol B, and the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol C are set, the game control microcomputer 101 operates based on the time saving flag. , it is possible to identify the time-saving state associated with the trigger, appropriately select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the time-saving state, and perform the special figure 2 variation pattern determination.

Next, a description will be given of a performance when the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a time-saving state based on each opportunity. First, the performance in the time saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 60 is a diagram mainly showing how the display section 50a performs an effect in the time-saving mode in the time-saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state. FIG. 60(A) is a diagram showing an ending effect being executed when a jackpot game ends as an effect before the effect in the time saving mode is performed, and FIG. 60(B) is a diagram showing an ending effect being executed when the ending effect is completed. Figures 60 (C) to 60 (E) show the situation immediately before the time saving mode is entered and the special figure variation effect starts, and Figures 60 (C) to 60 (E) show the special figure variation effect being performed in production mode B. It is a diagram.

As mentioned above, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the time-saving performance mode when the jackpot game state ends, and sends the time-saving performance mode start command indicating the start of the time-saving performance mode to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set. The set time saving mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the time-saving mode start command, it switches from the ending background image G202 to the time-saving background image G130, as shown in FIGS. 60(A) to 60(B). In addition, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, a game is basically played in which the second starting port 12 is won and the special figure 2 variable display is performed, so in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, An image (right-handed hitting image) G30 that encourages right-handed hitting is displayed. Furthermore, the image CPU 141 displays an image (remaining time saving number image) G31 indicating the remaining number of time saving times related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

Note that the specific display contents of the right-hand hitting image G30 and the time saving remaining number of times image G31 are not particularly limited as long as the functions thereof can be exhibited, but in the first embodiment, the right-hand hitting image G30 is displayed horizontally on the display section 50a. The time-saving remaining number of times image G31 is composed of a band-shaped base portion extending across the entire direction and a plurality of figures representing right-pointing arrows arranged horizontally on the base portion, and the time-saving remaining number of times image G31 is composed of the characters “remaining number of times XX times”. It consists of In the “〇〇” portion of the remaining time saving number image G31, a number representing the actual remaining number of time saving times is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(B), before the ending performance is finished and the special symbol variation performance in the time saving mode is started, "100" which is the specified number of time saving times related to the time saving state after the jackpot game state is is displayed. In addition, the image CPU 141 displays performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot game in a stopped state before the ending performance ends and the special symbol variation performance in the time saving mode starts.

Then, when the first special symbol variation display is started in the time-saving effect mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savers is reduced by 1. Then, when the first special symbol variation display ends, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60(D). Subsequently, when the second special symbol variation display is started in the time-saving effect mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown is further decreased by "1". After that, unless a jackpot is won, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variation pattern is executed appropriately in the time saving production mode, and each time the special figure variation display is started, the time saving indicated by the remaining time saving number image G31 is executed. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, the performance performed in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state triggered by the stopping display of the losing symbol C will be explained.

In the first embodiment, in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B, the production mode corresponding to the time saving state is different from the time saving production mode. Set. Hereinafter, this performance mode will be referred to as "super chance mode". In the super chance mode, as in the case of the time saving production mode, a background image exclusively for the super chance mode (background image G140 for the super chance mode) is displayed on the display section 50a, and BGM for the super chance mode is played from the speaker 52. (BGM for super chance mode) is output. In the first embodiment, the super chance mode background image G140 is composed of a moving image that introduces the scenery of the golf course.

For example, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a gaming state command indicating a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol and a gaming state command indicating a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B, the microcomputer 121 performs step After setting a new gaming state in the gaming state setting process of S4310, the production mode flag (super chance mode flag) indicating the super chance mode is turned ON in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and the super chance mode is started. The super chance mode start command shown is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set super chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the super chance mode start command, it switches the background image displayed immediately before on the display unit 50a to the super chance mode background image G140. In addition, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, a game is basically played in which the second starting port 12 is won and the special figure 2 variable display is performed, so in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, A right-hand hitting image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays a remaining time saving number image G31 representing the remaining number of time saving times related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

On the other hand, in a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C, a production mode corresponding to the time-saving state is set, unlike the time-saving production mode and the super chance mode. Hereinafter, this performance mode will be referred to as "short chance mode." In the short chance mode, a background image exclusively for the short chance mode (short chance mode background image G150) is displayed on the display section 50a, and the short chance Mode BGM (short chance mode BGM) is output. In the first embodiment, the short chance mode background image G150 is composed of a moving image showing a predetermined character jogging.

For example, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives a gaming state command indicating a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C, after setting a new gaming state in the gaming state setting process of step S4310, the performance control microcomputer 121 switches to the short chance mode. A performance mode flag (short chance mode flag) indicating the effect is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a short chance mode start command indicating the start of the short chance mode is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. The set short chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the short chance mode start command, it switches the background image displayed immediately before on the display section 50a to the short chance mode background image G150. In addition, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, basically a game will be played in which the second start opening 12 is won and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. A right-hand hitting image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays a remaining time saving number image G31 representing the remaining number of time saving times related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the first embodiment, a special pattern variation effect related to a small hit, a special pattern variation effect related to a loss of loss pattern type B, and a special pattern variation effect related to a loss of loss pattern type C are described. In the production, after the reach is established, a production dedicated to these special symbol variation productions is executed. In the following, this dedicated performance will be referred to as a "challenge performance."

In the challenge performance, a background image dedicated to the challenge performance (background image for challenge performance) G116 is displayed as a background image on the display section 50a. That is, when reach is established, the display unit 50a displays any of the normal background images that have been displayed up to that point (first normal background image G111, second normal background image G112, third normal background image G113). ), the screen switches to the challenge effect background image G116.

Next, specific examples of the super chance mode and the short chance mode will be explained. FIG. 61 is a diagram mainly showing how the display unit 50a is switched from the normal performance mode to the super chance mode, and the performance based on the super chance mode is performed. On the other hand, FIG. 61 is a diagram mainly showing how the display unit 50a is switched from the normal performance mode to the short chance mode, and the performance in the short chance mode is performed.

First, I will explain super chance mode. FIG. 61(A) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and FIG. 61(B) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and a small Figure 61 (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in a manner that suggests a win and a loss of the losing symbol B, and also suggests that the super chance mode is set. , Figures 61 (D) to 61 (F) are diagrams showing the situation immediately before the special figure variation effect in the super chance mode is started after the normal effect mode ends, and the special figure variation effect in the super chance mode is performed. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), when the challenge effect is being executed in the special pattern variation effect, when the special pattern variation display related to the small hit and loss symbol B ends, as shown in FIG. 61(B), , a small hit, and a loss of the loss pattern B, and the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a manner that suggests that the super chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the left performance pattern EZ1 has the characters "A mode that suggests a small hit and a loss of the loss pattern B and also suggests that a super chance mode is set" regarding the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. An image containing "super chance mode" (left super chance mode suggestion image) G32a, an image where the medium effect pattern EZ2 contains the text "mode" (middle super chance mode suggestion image) G32b, an image where the right production pattern EZ3 contains the text "rush" ( (Right Super Chance Mode Suggestion Image) Each is composed of G32c.

Note that, hereinafter, the left super chance mode suggestion image G32a, the middle super chance mode suggestion image G32b, and the right super chance mode suggestion image G32c are collectively referred to as "super chance mode suggestion image G32." The display of the super chance mode suggestion image G32 suggests that the super chance mode is set.

As mentioned above, immediately after the special symbol confirmation process ends, a gaming state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol or a gaming state indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B is issued. Since the command is sent to the performance control board 120, the super chance mode is set according to the special pattern confirmation time that has passed since the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the super chance mode start command is issued. is transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the challenge effect background image G116 is switched to the super chance mode background image G140. Also, from now on, it will be controlled in a time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, a game will basically be played in which a prize is won in the second starting port 12 and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Is displayed. Further, in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, a remaining time saving number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. In addition, in the first embodiment, the prescribed number of times for saving time related to the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B is "150", so it is a super chance. Immediately after setting the mode, when the remaining time saving number image G31 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61(C), the remaining time saving number image G31 suggests that the remaining number of time saving times is "150".

Subsequently, when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown decreases by "1". Then, when the first special symbol variation display ends, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 61(E). Subsequently, when the second special symbol variation display starts in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown is further decreased by "1". After that, unless a jackpot is won, the special pattern fluctuation performance based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern will be executed as appropriate in the super chance mode, and each time the special pattern fluctuation display starts, the time reduction indicated by the time reduction remaining number image G31 will be displayed. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, the short chance mode will be explained. FIG. 62(A) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and FIG. 62(B) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and a loss Figure 62 (C) is a diagram showing how the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in a manner that suggests that the symbol C is a loss and that the short chance mode is set. 62(D) to 62(F) are diagrams showing the state immediately before the special symbol fluctuation performance in the short chance mode is started after the completion of the special symbol fluctuation performance in the short chance mode. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), when the challenge effect is being executed in the special pattern variation effect, when the special figure variation display related to losing symbol C ends, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the losing symbol The performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests that C is a loss and that a short chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the left performance pattern EZ1 has the characters "short chance" as "an aspect that suggests the loss of the loss pattern C and also suggests that the short chance mode is set" regarding the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. Image containing the image (left short chance mode suggestion image) G33a, image where the medium effect pattern EZ2 contains the text "mode" (medium short chance mode suggestion image) G33b, image where the right effect pattern EZ3 contains the text "rush" (right short chance mode suggestion image) G33c.

In addition, below, the left short chance mode suggestion image G33a, the medium short chance mode suggestion image G33b, and the right short chance mode suggestion image G33c are collectively referred to as "short chance mode suggestion image G33." The display of the short chance mode suggestion image G33 suggests that the short chance mode is set.

As mentioned above, immediately after the special symbol confirmation process is finished, the game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C is sent to the production control board 120, so the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped. In response to the elapse of the special figure confirmation time after the display, the short chance mode is set and a short chance mode start command is sent to the image control board 140. Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the challenge effect background image G116 is switched to the short chance mode background image G150. In addition, from now on, the control will be in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, basically a game will be played in which a prize is won in the second starting port 12 and the special figure 2 variable display is performed, so the right-handed image G30 will be displayed in a predetermined area of the display section 50a. Is displayed. Further, in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, a remaining time saving number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. In addition, in the first embodiment, since the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C is "50", immediately after setting the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. 62(C) When the remaining time saving number image G31 is displayed, the remaining time saving number image G31 suggests that the remaining number of time saving times is "50".

Subsequently, when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown decreases by "1". Then, when the first special symbol variation display ends, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 62(E). Subsequently, when the second special symbol fluctuation display is started in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown is further decreased by "1". After that, unless a jackpot is won, the special pattern fluctuation performance based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern will be executed as appropriate in the short chance mode, and each time the special pattern fluctuation display is started, the time reduction indicated by the time reduction remaining number image G31 will be displayed. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode, When the stop display of the small winning symbol or the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed, the prescribed number of time-savings is 150 times and the second time-saving state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used according to the stop display. A time saving state is set and the game shifts to a low probability, high base game state, and at the same time shifts to a super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed, the time saving prescribed number of times is 50 and the time saving state is set in which the third time saving state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used, according to the stop display. A transition is made to a low probability, high base game state, and a transition is made to a short chance mode.

In addition, when a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode. When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also shifts to the jackpot production mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol C, a time saving state is set in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 100 and the special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used. At the same time as transitioning to a high probability base gaming state, the game transitions to a time-saving performance mode. In addition, when the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also to the jackpot performance mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of jackpot symbols A and B, a time saving state is set in which the first time saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used, and the transition to a high probability high base gaming state is established. At the same time, it shifts to the variable performance mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the time saving state may occur without executing the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to give a positive surprise to the player and improve his/her interest in the game. In addition, if a losing pattern or a small winning pattern that is different from the jackpot pattern that generates a jackpot game is stopped and displayed, the time is shortened, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the stopping display of the losing pattern or the small winning pattern. This will improve your enjoyment of the game.

Also, if it is determined to be a losing symbol B or C in the losing symbol type determination before the special symbol fluctuation display is performed, that is, it is determined that the time saving state can be made by determining whether or not the time saving state can be made. When this happens, the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, so that the player is provided with an advantageous opportunity other than winning a jackpot. Therefore, the game becomes deeper and the game becomes more interesting. Furthermore, in addition to the stop display of losing symbols B and C and the stop display of small winning symbols, the time saving state may occur after a jackpot game is executed. In this way, by providing a plurality of routes to the time-saving state, the game is appropriately complicated and the game's interest is improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, when a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it may enter a time-saving state, and the special symbol can be displayed in the time-saving state and in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state). Since the conditions for determining the two variation patterns are different, specifically, the special figure two variation pattern determination tables are different, the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be appropriately complicated, and the game interest can be improved. . Furthermore, as special symbols different from the jackpot symbol that can be put into a time-saving state, there are a loss symbol B, a lose symbol C, and a small win symbol, and a stop display for the lose symbol B and a stop display for the small win symbol were performed. The conditions for determining the special pattern 2 variation pattern in the time-saving state are different between the case and the case where the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed.Specifically, the special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table is different. The game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 can be appropriately complicated, and monotony and boredom in a time-saving state can be prevented, thereby improving game interest.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the special figure 1 loss symbol types that cause the time saving state are two types, loss symbols B and C, but may be three or more types. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be changed depending on the losing symbol type. In addition, in the first embodiment, the special pattern 2 losing symbol type includes only losing symbols that do not cause a time-saving state, but like the special pattern 1 losing symbol type, a losing symbol type that causes a time-saving state is provided. It's okay. In this case, in the time-saving state, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table as any special pattern 1 losing symbol type that causes the time-saving state may be used; A different special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 jackpot determination table does not include a small win, but it may include a small win so that a small win can be won even in the special figure 2 jackpot determination. In this case, the time saving state may be set upon completion of the stop display of the small winning symbol. Furthermore, in the time saving state in this case, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern judgment table as after the stop display of the small winning symbol related to special pattern 1 may be used, or a different special pattern 2 variation pattern judgment table may be used. .

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the small winning symbols are not provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols, but may be provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of small winning symbol. Further, in the first embodiment, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state always occurs after the stop display, but there may be cases where the time saving state does not occur. That is, the small winning symbols may include a type of small winning symbol that causes a time saving state and a type of small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state. Alternatively, only small winning symbols that do not cause a time saving state may be provided.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the time saving state can be entered by either the stop display of the small winning symbol or the stop display of the losing symbol, but as a trigger other than the end of the jackpot game state, only the stop display of one of the symbols It may also be configured so that it can be provided. Furthermore, instead of generating a time-saving state due to the fact that a small hit symbol is derived as a result of the jackpot determination by the jackpot determination or the loss symbols B and C are derived as the result of the loss symbol type determination by the loss symbol type determination, For example, before determining the jackpot, it may be determined whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination). In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is determined by generating a time-saving state and not generating a time-saving state. The time saving determination may be made by comparing the time saving determination table with an appropriately allocated time saving determination table. Then, when it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed or after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this case, small winning symbols and losing symbols are determined depending on whether the time saving judgment results in a time saving state being generated or the time saving judgment resulting in a time saving state not occurring. It may be different. Furthermore, when a judgment result that a time saving state is generated in the time saving judgment is derived, the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is further determined from among a plurality of types, and the jackpot according to the first embodiment is Even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table and the prescribed number of time-savings (termination conditions) used in the time-saving state are different depending on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, such as symbol type determination and losing symbol type determination. good.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table is used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, but different A special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used. Further, although the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B shift to the same performance mode, they may shift to different performance modes.

Further, in the first embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C shift to different production modes, but they shift to the same production mode. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the same prescribed number of times is set for the time saving state after the stop display of the small win symbol and the time saver state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, but the number of times is different. A prescribed number of time saving times may be set. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, different prescribed times of time saving are set for the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C, but the same number of times is set. A prescribed number of time saving times may be set. Furthermore, the same specified number of times of time saving may be set in all of the opportunity time saving states related to the low probability high base gaming state.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. The second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that a time saving state may be set in response to the stop display of a small winning symbol and the stop display of a losing symbol. Below, as a second embodiment, the basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the first embodiment, in response to the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the small winning symbol/loss symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C, a common 1 is determined as a game state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12. Two time-saving conditions were set. However, in the second embodiment, time-saving states with different ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12) are set depending on the timing of the time-saving state. In the following, the time-saving state that is set when the jackpot game ends is referred to as the "first time-saving state," and the time-saving state that is set when the small winning symbol/losing symbol B is stopped is referred to as the "second time-saving state." The time-saving state that is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol C is referred to as the "third time-saving state."

As explained in the basic embodiment, the second starting port 12 is opened as a configuration that affects the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12) related to the time saving state. There are the winning probability (winning winning probability), the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game. Then, the hit judgment to determine whether it is a hit or not is performed using the hit judgment table, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment to determine the normal pattern variation time is performed using the normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table, and the second starting gate The auxiliary game opened by 12 is played using the auxiliary game control table. Here, in the basic embodiment (first embodiment), ease of opening the second starting port 12 is associated with each table, and the table used in the non-time saving state and the table used in the time saving state However, in the second embodiment, in accordance with the fact that there are multiple types of time saving states, a table used in non-time saving states and a table used in non-time saving states are provided. The table is divided into a table used in the current state, a table used in the second time saving state, and a table used in the third time saving state.

FIG. 64(A) shows a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the second embodiment, FIG. 64(B) shows a configuration example of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 64(C) shows an example of the configuration of the auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 64(A), when the hit determination table for the non-time saving state is used, a hit is determined with a probability of 6600/65536, and when the hit determination table for the first time saving state is used. is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536, and if the hit determination table for the second time saving state is used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 50000/65536, and the hit determination table for the third time saving state is If it is used, it will be determined as a hit with a probability of 65,000/65,536. Therefore, it is likely to be determined as a hit in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non time saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is used, the regular figure fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped, When the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time-saving state is used, the ordinary figure fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped, and the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second time-saving state is determined. When the table is used, the ordinary figure fluctuation time is determined to be 7 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped, and when the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is used, the ordinary figure fluctuation time to be stopped is determined to be 7 seconds. Regardless of the type of figure, the ordinary figure variation time is determined to be 3 seconds. Therefore, in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non time saving state, the number of executions per unit time of the regular pattern fluctuation display increases (execution frequency) increases.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 64(C), when the auxiliary game control table for the non-time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds, and the first time saving state When the auxiliary game control table for the auxiliary game is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.0 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is used, the auxiliary game If the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 4.0 seconds and the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.6 seconds. Become. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in one auxiliary game increases in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non time saving state.

In this way, depending on the type of time-saving state, the hit determination table, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and auxiliary game control table are different, and the probability of winning is determined as follows: 3rd time-saving state > 1st time-saving state > 2nd time-saving state The order is higher in the order of normal figure fluctuation time, the third time saving state>the first time saving state>the second time saving state is shorter, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is the third time saving state>the first time saving state. Longest in the order of time saving state > second time saving state. As mentioned above, as the winning probability increases, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases, and as the regular pattern fluctuation time becomes shorter, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases. As the opening time of the starting port 12 becomes longer, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases. Therefore, in view of this, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state, and it can be said that the time saving state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 requires the first time saving state, the second time saving state, It is also necessary to specify the third time saving state. Here, in the first embodiment, the time saving flag after jackpot game state, the time saving flag after small winning symbol display, the time saving flag after losing symbol B display, and the time saving flag after losing symbol C display are set, and after the jackpot gaming state, The state where the time saving flag is turned on is specified as the "first time saving state", and the state where the time saving flag is turned on after the small winning symbol is displayed and the time saving flag is turned on after the losing symbol B is displayed is specified as the "second time saving state". Then, the state in which the time saving flag is turned on after the losing symbol C is displayed is specified as a "third time saving state".

Therefore, when making a hit determination in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the hit determination table for the first time saving state if the time saving flag is ON after the jackpot game state, and selects the hit determination table for the first time saving state, and If the time saving flag after displaying a winning symbol and the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol B are ON, the hit determination table for the second time saving state is selected, and if the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol C is ON, the third time saving flag is selected. Select the hit judgment table for the state. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines the normal pattern variation pattern in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, if the time saving flag is turned on after the jackpot game state, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines the normal pattern variation pattern for the first time saving state. Select the table, and if the time saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol and the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol B are ON, select the normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state, and select the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol C. When is turned on, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is selected. Furthermore, when controlling the auxiliary game (opening the second starting port 12) in the auxiliary game control process of step S1105, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the first Select the auxiliary game control table for the time-saving state, and if the time-saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol and the time-saving flag after displaying the losing symbol B are ON, select the auxiliary game control table for the second time-saving state, and select the auxiliary game control table for the second time-saving state. If the time saving flag is turned on after C is displayed, the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is selected.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state are the time saving state after the jackpot game state of the first embodiment, the time saving state after the small winning symbol stops/the losing symbol B stops. state, corresponds to the time saving state after the small hit symbol C stops. Then, the gaming state in which the normal probability state is set as the gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot and the first time saving state is set as the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is referred to as "first low probability". "High base gaming state". Similarly, a gaming state in which a normal probability state is set and a second time saving state is set is referred to as a "second low probability high base gaming state", and a gaming state in which a normal probability state is set and a third time saving state is set. The gaming state in which is set is referred to as the "third low probability high base gaming state".

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, as for the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, in the first time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used, similar to the first embodiment. In the 2nd time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 2nd time saving state is used, and in the 3rd time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 3rd time saving state is used. Furthermore, regarding the prescribed number of time reductions related to the time reduction state, similarly to the first embodiment, the prescribed number of time reductions related to the first time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot symbols C and F is set to 100, and the number of time reduction regulations related to the first time reduction state is set to 100. The prescribed number of times of time saving related to the state is set to 150 times, and the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the third time saving state is set to 50 times. In addition, regarding the production mode related to the time saving state, similarly to the first embodiment, the production mode related to the first time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot symbols C and F is set to the time saving mode, and the production mode related to the second time saving state is set to the time saving mode. The production mode related to the third time saving state is set to the super chance mode, and the production mode related to the third time saving state is set to the short chance mode.

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode, When the stop display of the small winning symbol or the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed, the prescribed number of time-savings is 150 times and the second time-saving state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used according to the stop display. A second time saving state is set and the game shifts to a second low probability high base game state, and at the same time shifts to a super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed, a third time saving state is set in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 50 and the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is used, according to the stop display. Then, the game enters a third low probability, high base gaming state, and also enters a short chance mode.

In addition, when a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode. When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also shifts to the jackpot production mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol C, a first time-saving state is set in which the prescribed number of time-savings is 100 and the first time-saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used. At the same time, the game shifts to a low probability, high base game state, and shifts to a time saving performance mode. In addition, when the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also to the jackpot performance mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of jackpot symbols A and B, a time saving state is set in which the first time saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used, and the transition to a high probability high base gaming state is established. At the same time, it shifts to the variable performance mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when the losing pattern B, the losing pattern C, and the small winning pattern, which are different from the jackpot pattern, are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not executed and the time saving state is entered. , different types of time-saving states, in detail, the constituent elements (win Since the winning probability, normal figure fluctuation time, and opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game are different in the time saving state, the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 is appropriately complicated, and the time saving state is not monotonous. It is possible to prevent boredom and improve the game's interest. Furthermore, in order to determine the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state in the case where the stop display of the losing pattern B and the small winning pattern are performed, and the case where the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, Since the conditions are different, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, it is possible to vary the game related to the time saving state and improve the game interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened, and special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (loss pattern B, loss symbol C, small winning symbol) are displayed. When it is stopped and displayed, there are times when the time is shortened, and when a jackpot game is executed, and when a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (losing symbol B, losing symbol C, small winning symbol) is stopped and displayed. , there are different types of time-saving states, more specifically, the constituent elements (winning probability, regular pattern fluctuation time, opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different in the pachinko game machine PY1. The game flow can be appropriately complicated, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous or boring due to time-saving conditions, thereby improving the game's interest. Furthermore, a time saving state (first time saving state) when a jackpot game is executed and a time saving state (first time saving state) when special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (loss symbol B, lose symbol C, small winning symbol) are stopped and displayed. Since the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened differs between the second time saving state and the third time saving state, the time saving state can be varied and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, the conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are different in the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, so Furthermore, it is possible to vary the game related to the time-saving state, which improves the interest in the game.

(Example of modification of second embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be described. Game states (non-time saving state/first time saving state/second time saving state/third time saving state) related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12) in the second embodiment ) (probability of winning/win pattern fluctuation time/opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is set to be high in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state, but this order may be changed as appropriate. Also good. Further, the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 may be set to be the same or substantially the same between some or all types of time saving states. In this case, even if the overall ease of opening is the same or almost the same, the elements that make up the time saving state (probability of winning / normal figure fluctuation time / opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different. By doing so, it is preferable that even if the overall ease of opening is the same or substantially the same, the details of the time-saving state are different, so that the player's experience with the time-saving state is different. This is because the gameplay, especially the time-saving conditions, can be diversified and the monotony of the game can be prevented.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined for each time saving state, the same general pattern fluctuation time is determined regardless of the type of normal pattern (win/loss) that is stopped and displayed. , it may be determined at different ordinary figure fluctuation times depending on the type of ordinary figure. Furthermore, like the special pattern fluctuation pattern, it is configured such that it can be determined to one of a plurality of types of regular pattern fluctuation time for either or both of winning and losing. By acquiring a random number such as a fluctuation pattern random number, the regular pattern fluctuation time may be determined by judgment. In addition, in the second embodiment, the stop time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state, but like the winning probability, the variation time of the common symbol, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game, It may be different depending on the gaming state.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 losing symbol types that cause the time saving state are two types, losing symbols B and C, but there may be three or more types. In this case, as in the second embodiment, the type of time saving state may be changed depending on the type of losing symbol. In addition, in the second embodiment, the special pattern 2 losing symbol type includes only losing symbols that do not cause a time-saving state, but like the special pattern 1 losing symbol type, a losing symbol type that causes a time-saving state is provided. It's okay. In this case, in the time-saving state, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table as any special pattern 1 losing symbol type that causes the time-saving state may be used; A different special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used.

Further, in the second embodiment, the small winning symbols are not provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols, but may be provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols. In this case, the type of time saving state may be varied depending on the type of small winning symbol. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used may be different depending on the type of time saving state.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the same type of second time-saving state occurs after the stop display of the small winning symbol and after the stop display of the losing symbol B, but the time-saving states of different types are set. Also good. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used may be different depending on the type of time saving state. Further, although the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B shift to the same performance mode, they may shift to different performance modes. Further, in the second embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C shift to different production modes, but they shift to the same production mode. You can do it like this.

In addition, instead of generating a time-saving state due to the fact that a small winning symbol is derived as a jackpot determination result in the jackpot determination or the loss symbols B and C are derived as a loss symbol type determination result in the loss type determination, for example, Before determining the jackpot, it may be determined whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination). In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is determined by generating a time-saving state and not generating a time-saving state. The time saving determination may be made by comparing the time saving determination table with an appropriately allocated time saving determination table. When it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed or after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this case, small winning symbols and losing symbols are determined depending on whether the time saving judgment results in a time saving state being generated or the time saving judgment resulting in a time saving state not occurring. It may be different. Furthermore, when a judgment result that a time saving state is generated in the time saving judgment is derived, the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is further determined from among a plurality of types, and the jackpot according to the first embodiment is Like symbol type determination and losing symbol type determination, depending on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the type of time saving state (elements constituting the time saving state (probability of winning, normal pattern fluctuation pattern, 2), the specific content of the opening time of the starting port 12), the special figure determination table used in the time saving state, and the prescribed number of time saving times (termination condition) may be different.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. The third embodiment is almost the same as the first embodiment, but in the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C, the time saving state after the stop display of the small win symbol, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the state is used, that is, the time-saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving state after the stop-display of the losing symbol B, and the time-saving state after the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed. This differs from the first embodiment in that the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used in common. In the following, a basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described as the third embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

FIG. 66 shows the special symbol 2 variation used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small win symbol, the time saver state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C in the third embodiment. A pattern determination table is shown. In addition, this special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B in the first embodiment. (Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state) However, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table common to these three time saving states is not limited to this, and the losing symbol C in the first embodiment is It may be a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state) used in the time saving state after the stop display. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table common to these three time saving states is different from the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the third time saving state. It may also be configured with a variation pattern determination table.

In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing symbol C shall be the same. Accordingly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is changed as shown in FIG. 67. Specifically, if it is determined in step S1683 that the time-saving state is not after the jackpot gaming state, the process directly advances to step S1686, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state is selected.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment is used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing symbol C. Although the table is the same, the prescribed number of times of time saving is the same as in the first embodiment, the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time saving state after the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed. is set to 150 times, and the prescribed number of times for time saving related to the time saving state after the stop display of losing symbol C is set to 50 times. However, the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time reduction state after the stop display of the loss symbol B are the same as the number of time reduction regulations related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the loss symbol C. Also good.

Furthermore, regarding the production mode, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B is set as the super chance mode. The production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the symbol C is set as the short chance mode. However, the production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B may be the same as the production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C. .

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the third embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened and the special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (loss pattern B, loss symbol C, small win There are times when the time-saving state occurs when the symbols) are stopped and displayed, and when a jackpot game is executed, and when special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (losing symbols B, losing symbols C, and small winning symbols) are stopped and displayed. Since the conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are different from the case where the special figure 2 variation pattern is determined, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is moderately complicated, and , it is possible to prevent monotony and boredom in the time-saving state, and improve the game's interest. In addition, there are losing symbols B, losing symbols C, and small winning symbols as special symbols (losing symbols B, losing symbols C, and small winning symbols) that are different from the jackpot symbols that cause a time-saving state, and the stop display of the losing symbol B The conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are the same in the later time saving state, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C, and the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol. Since the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 is shared, it is possible to prevent the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 from becoming excessively complicated and reducing the interest in the game. Furthermore, the end condition, specifically the prescribed number of times, is set in the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C. Since the game is different, the time-saving state can be varied, and the game becomes more interesting.

(Example of modification of third embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the third embodiment will be described. Although the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C is the same, The special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state after the stop display of symbol B and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saver state after the stop display of losing symbol C are the same, and this feature The fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 may be different from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the prescribed number of time-savings related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the prescribed number of time-savings related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C are the same, and this prescribed number of time-savings and the small winning symbol The predetermined number of times of time saving related to the time saving state after the stop display may be different. In addition, the production mode related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the production mode related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C are the same, and this production mode and the stop display of the small winning pattern The production mode related to the later time saving state may be different.

In addition, instead of generating a time-saving state due to the fact that a small winning symbol is derived as a jackpot determination result in the jackpot determination or the loss symbols B and C are derived as a loss symbol type determination result in the loss type determination, for example, Before the jackpot determination, it may be determined whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination). In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is determined by generating a time-saving state and not generating a time-saving state. The time saving determination may be performed by comparing the time saving determination table with an appropriately allocated time saving determination table. When it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed or after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this case, small winning symbols and losing symbols are determined depending on whether the time saving judgment results in a time saving state being generated or the time saving judgment resulting in a time saving state not occurring. It may be different. Furthermore, when a judgment result that a time saving state is generated in the time saving judgment is derived, the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is further determined from among a plurality of types, and the jackpot according to the first embodiment is As in symbol type determination and losing symbol type determination, the prescribed number of times of time saving (termination condition) may be different depending on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. Below, as the fourth embodiment, the basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot symbol type determined in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination is different from the first embodiment. Specifically, as jackpot symbol types that can be determined in the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type determination, there are jackpot symbols G and jackpot symbols H in addition to the aforementioned jackpot symbols A, jackpot symbols B, and jackpot symbols C.

FIG. 68(A) shows an example of the structure of the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table. As shown in FIG. 68(A), in the fourth embodiment, when the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type is determined based on the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol A is determined with a probability of 15%, A jackpot symbol B is determined with a 35% probability, a jackpot symbol C is determined with a 20% probability, a jackpot symbol G is determined with a 15% probability, and a jackpot symbol H is determined with a 15% probability. However, the determined probability for each jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the fourth embodiment as well, the jackpot game component is associated with the jackpot symbol type, and the jackpot game is performed based on the jackpot game control table. FIG. 68(B) shows a configuration example of the jackpot game control table.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "seventh jackpot game") associated with the jackpot symbol G, a round game is played four times. In each round game from 1R to 4R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 15.0 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the start of the seventh jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 5.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the seventh jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol H (hereinafter also referred to as the "eighth jackpot game"), the round game is played four times. In each round game from 1R to 4R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 15.0 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 5.0 seconds from the start of the eighth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the eighth jackpot game.

Further, the game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition are also associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game, as in the first embodiment. FIG. 68(C) shows a configuration example of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship between the jackpot symbol type, the gaming state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition. As shown in FIG. 68(C), after the jackpot symbol G, the game is controlled in a high probability low base game state. Then, no end condition is set for the high probability state related to the high probability low base. On the other hand, after the jackpot symbol H, the game is controlled in a low probability low base game state. In this way, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol G and the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol H, the game is controlled in a non-time saving state, so basically the first starting port 11 is A game will be played in which the player wins a prize and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Although details will be described later, in the high probability low base game state after the jackpot symbol G and the low probability low base game state after the jackpot symbol H, a common performance mode (hidden mode) is performed.

By the way, in the first embodiment, when the stop display of small winning symbols and the stop display of losing symbols B and C are performed, a time saving state may be set according to the stop table. And, whether or not to set the time saving state and the end conditions related to the time saving state when setting the time saving state are determined by the gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for small winning symbol stop display, gaming state setting table for losing symbol stop display) ) was judged based on. Also in the fourth embodiment, when the stop display of small winning symbols and the stop display of losing symbols B and C are performed, the game state setting table (game state setting table for small winning symbol stopping display, game state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols, The gaming state to be controlled thereafter is determined based on the setting table).

FIGS. 69(A) to 69(D) show game state setting tables related to the stop display of small winning symbols and losing symbols B and C. FIG. 69(A) is a gaming state setting table for stopping display of small winning symbols in a low probability low base gaming state (gaming state setting table for stopping display of small winning symbols with low probability and non-time saving), and FIG. 69(B) is the gaming state setting table (low Fig. 69(C) is a gaming state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols B and C in a low probability low base game state (low probability non-time saving game state setting table for small winning symbols stop display). Fig. 69 (D) shows game states other than the low probability low base game state, namely the high probability low base game state, the high probability high base game state, and the low probability This is a gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in a high base gaming state (gaming state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols other than low probability non-time saving).

As shown in FIG. 69(A), a time saving state is set in response to the stop display of the small winning symbol in the low probability low base game state, and the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special symbol variable display "150". times”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the time saving state is not set in response to the stop display of small winning symbols in the high probability low base gaming state, the high probability high base gaming state, and the low probability high base gaming state. Therefore, in a low probability low base game state after a jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol H, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in a situation where the special pattern 1 variable display is performed by hitting left, the time saving state will be entered, but the jackpot In a high probability low base game state after a jackpot game related to symbol G, a shift to a time saving state does not occur even if a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in a situation where a special symbol 1 variable display is performed by hitting left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a time saving state is set in response to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in the low probability low base game state. Here, the end condition of the time saving state related to the losing pattern B is the number of executions of the special pattern variable display "150 times", and the ending condition of the time saving state related to the losing pattern C is the number of executions of the special pattern variable display "50 times". times”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the time saving state is set according to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in the high probability low base gaming state, the high probability high base gaming state, and the low probability high base gaming state. Not done. Therefore, in a low probability low base game state after a jackpot game related to jackpot symbol H, if losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in a situation where special symbol 1 variable display is performed by hitting left, the time saving state will be entered. In a high-probability, low-base game state after a jackpot game related to a jackpot symbol G, a shift to a time-saving state does not occur even if losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in a situation where the special symbol 1 variable display is performed by left-handed hitting.

Next, characteristic parts of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment described based on FIG. 63 will be omitted. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, when a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, in the normal presentation mode, the presentations by the first normal presentation stage, the second normal presentation stage, and the third normal presentation stage are performed. During execution, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol G is performed, the seventh jackpot game is executed according to the stop display, while when the stop display of the jackpot symbol H is performed, the stop display corresponds to the stop display. Accordingly, the eighth jackpot game is executed.

As mentioned above, the jackpot game components of the seventh jackpot game and the jackpot game components of the eighth jackpot game are set to be the same. Although the explanation of the specific production contents will be omitted, in the seventh jackpot game and the eighth jackpot game, a second jackpot production mode that is exclusive and common to the seventh jackpot game and the eighth jackpot game is set. An opening performance, a round game performance, and an ending performance that are exclusive and common to the 7th jackpot game and the 8th jackpot game are performed. Therefore, from the perspective of performance, when the seventh jackpot game and the eighth jackpot game are being executed, it is difficult to determine which jackpot game is being executed, that is, which jackpot symbol type, jackpot symbol G or jackpot symbol H, is stopped. It is difficult to determine whether it has been displayed.

Then, in response to the end of the seventh jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol G, a high probability low base gaming state is set, and after the jackpot game, the game is played in the high probability low base gaming state, while the jackpot symbol In response to the end of the eighth jackpot game related to H, a low probability low base gaming state is set, and after the jackpot game, the game is played in the low probability low base gaming state. In the high-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot symbol G and the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, a common hidden performance mode dedicated to the game state is set, and the performance by the hidden performance mode (especially, Special figure fluctuation performance) will be held.

Although a detailed explanation of the contents of the latent effect mode will be omitted, in the latent effect mode, a background image exclusively for the latent effect mode is displayed, similar to the variable rate effect mode and the time-saving effect mode. Dedicated BGM is output from the speaker 52. In addition, in the hidden performance mode, reach performances (SP reach, L reach) and preview performances exclusive to the hidden performance mode are performed.

In the high-probability low-base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol G and the low-probability low-base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol H, the game is played in a non-time saving state consisting of the same component of opening ease of the second starting port 12. Since the performance is executed in the same common latent performance mode, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the game state is a high probability low base game state or a low probability low base game state.

Then, in the high-probability low-base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol G, the low-probability low-base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol H, and in the hidden performance mode, perform a left hit to win the first starting opening 11, and special symbol 1 When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed in a situation in which a variable display is executed, a third jackpot game is executed in the same way as in the normal game state, and the first jackpot win is executed in the third jackpot game. The production mode is set. Then, in response to the end of the third jackpot game, a time-saving state is set in which the prescribed number of time-savings as an end condition is 100 times, and the first time-saving state special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is used, so that the probability is low. At the same time as transitioning to a high base gaming state, transition is made to a time saving performance mode. Note that the first jackpot production mode is the same as the jackpot production mode in the first embodiment.

In addition, in a low probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, and in a situation where a game is being played in which a left hit is made in the hidden production mode to win the first starting opening 11 and the special symbol 1 variable display is executed, When the stop display of the losing symbol B and the stop display of the small winning symbol are performed, the prescribed number of time reductions as the end condition is 150 times, and the second A time saving state in which the time saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used is set and the game shifts to a low probability high base game state, and at the same time shifts to a super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed, according to the stop display, the prescribed number of times as the end condition is 50, and the time saver state in which the third time saver state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used. is set, the game shifts to a low probability high base gaming state, and at the same time shifts to a short chance mode.

In this way, when the small winning symbol or the losing symbol B, C is stopped and displayed in the low probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H and in the latent performance mode, in the same way as in the normal gaming state, in response to the stopped display, A time saving state is set, and the game shifts to a low probability, high base gaming state, and also shifts to a super chance mode or a short chance mode. However, in the fourth embodiment, even if the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the high probability low base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol G and in the latent production mode, the time saving state is not set, and , does not shift to super chance mode or short chance mode. That is, the high probability low base game state and the hidden performance mode continue as they are.

In addition, when the small winning symbol or the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed in the low probability low base game state and the latent production mode, in the special symbol fluctuation production, the "small winning symbol" is finally displayed as shown in FIG. The stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a mode (first special mode) that suggests a hit and a loss of the losing symbol B and also suggests that a super chance mode is set. On the other hand, when the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed in the low probability low base game state and the latent production mode, in the special symbol variation production, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests that the short chance mode is set (second special mode). However, in the high-probability low-base game state and in the latent performance mode, when the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, in the special symbol variation performance, the first special mode and the second special mode are finally displayed. In this case, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are not stopped and displayed, but the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a normal loss as shown in FIG. 20(F).

In addition, the latent production mode related to the high probability low base game state will continue unless a jackpot is won, but the latent production mode related to the low probability low base game state will be executed 100 times. When this happens, the game ends and the hidden performance mode shifts to the normal performance mode.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment, the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the low probability low base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol H and in the latent performance mode. In response to the stop display, a time saving state is set and the game shifts to a low probability, high base gaming state, and also shifts to a super chance mode or a short chance mode. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment, even if the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the high probability low base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol G and in the latent performance mode, In response to the stop display, the time saving state is not set, and the high probability low base gaming state and the hidden performance mode continue without shifting to the super chance mode or the short chance mode. Therefore, opportunities other than winning a jackpot that give the player an advantage are provided, and while the game becomes deeper and the game becomes more interesting, the player ends up having an extreme advantage, which actually reduces the player's interest in the game. This can be prevented. In addition, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state, the same special figure 1 is stopped and displayed even though the performance is performed using a common hidden performance mode that makes it difficult to distinguish between the game states. However, if it is in a low probability state, it will shift to the time saving state, but if it is in a high probability state, it will not shift to the time saving state, so if you pay close attention to the stop display on special map 1, you can increase the probability of winning the jackpot. It is possible to determine the gaming state related to.

(Example of modification of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that the fourth embodiment can also be applied to modifications of the first embodiment as long as no contradiction occurs (consistency can be achieved). In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot symbol H is provided as a jackpot symbol type that pairs with the jackpot symbol G, but the jackpot symbol H may not be provided. That is, the low probability high base game state may not be set due to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this case, in a situation where a high-probability low-base game state is set after a jackpot game and a performance is performed in the latent performance mode, it can be easily determined that the high-probability low-base game state is in place.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop display of loss symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol are performed in the low probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, the time saving state is set in accordance with the stop display. However, the time saving state may not be set for all or part of these stop displays. In this case, the same applies to the super chance mode and the short chance mode.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, an end condition is not provided for the high probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol G, but an end condition may be provided. In this case, for example, the number of executions of special figure variable display may be set as the termination condition. In both the high-probability low-base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol G and the low-probability low-base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol H, the special symbol variable display is displayed for the number of executions of the special symbol variable display related to the end condition. When executed, the latent performance mode may be terminated and the hidden performance mode may be shifted to the normal performance mode.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the aforementioned basic embodiment, first embodiment, and fourth embodiment of the present invention. The fifth embodiment is mainly common to the fourth embodiment in that a jackpot symbol G and a jackpot symbol H are provided as the jackpot symbol types of the special drawing 1. The contents of the jackpot game (jackpot game component) related to the jackpot symbol G and the jackpot symbol H, the game state after the jackpot game, and the termination conditions are also common to the fourth embodiment. In the following, the fifth embodiment will be mainly described with respect to its differences from the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the fourth embodiment, or similar configurations.

In the fifth embodiment, unlike the fourth embodiment, in addition to the low probability low base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol H, the small winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the high probability low base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol G. is performed, and when the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, a time saving state is set in accordance with the stopped display and the game shifts to a high probability high base gaming state. Moreover, the time saving state corresponds to the stop display of small winning symbols and losing symbols B and C in the low probability low base gaming state, and the stop display of the small winning symbols and losing symbols B and C in the high probability low base gaming state. The ease of opening the second starting port 12 (easiness of opening), that is, the elements constituting the time saving state (the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game, the normal pattern fluctuation time, and Winning probability (hereinafter referred to as "time saving state component") and ending conditions may differ.

FIG. 71 shows a gaming state setting table related to the stop display of small winning symbols and losing symbols B and C. FIG. 71(A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a gaming state setting table for stopping display of small winning symbols in a low probability low base gaming state (gaming state setting table for stopping display of small winning symbols with low probability non-time saving). 71(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a gaming state setting table related to the stop display of small winning symbols in a high probability low base gaming state (gaming state setting table for stopping display of small winning symbols with high probability non-time saving), FIG. (C) is a configuration example of a gaming state setting table (game state setting table for time-saving small winning symbol stop display) in the case of stopping display of small winning symbols in a high probability high base gaming state and a low probability high base gaming state. The diagram shown in FIG. 71(D) shows a configuration example of a gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for low probability non-time-saving losing symbols stop display) related to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in a low probability low base gaming state. The diagram shown in FIG. 71(E) shows a configuration example of a gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for high probability non-time-saving losing symbol stopping display) related to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in a high probability low base gaming state. The figure shown in FIG. 71(F) is a gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state (gaming state setting table for time saving losing symbol stopping display) It is a figure showing an example of composition.

In addition, the game state setting table for low probability non-time-saving losing pattern stop display related to losing symbol B (gaming state setting table for low-probability non-time-saving losing symbol B stop display) table) and a gaming state setting table for low probability non-time saving losing pattern stop display related to losing symbol C (gaming state setting table for low probability non time saving losing symbol C stop display), and a high probability non time saving losing symbol stop display. The display game state setting table includes a high probability non-time saving losing pattern stop display game state setting table related to losing symbol B (high probability non time saving losing symbol B stop display gaming state setting table) and a gaming state setting table related to losing symbol C. There is a game state setting table for high probability non-time saving losing symbol stop display (high probability non time saving losing symbol C stop display gaming state setting table), and the gaming state setting table for time saving losing symbol stop display includes losing symbol B A gaming state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display related to (game state setting table for time-saving loss symbol B stop display) and a gaming state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display related to losing symbol C (for time-saving loss symbol C stop display) There is a game status setting table). That is, in the game state setting table related to losing symbols, the gaming state and the losing symbol type are associated with each other.

Here, the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, the time saving state includes a first time saving state and a second time saving state. Although the details of each time saving state are different, the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 related to the time saving state (ease of opening), that is, the time saving state components differ depending on the type of the time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 71(A) to 71(F), in the low-probability low-base gaming state, when the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stopping display of the losing symbol C are performed, A first time saving state is set. Then, the end condition of the first time saving state related to the small winning symbol and the losing symbol B is set that the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times (the number of executions of the special symbol variable display is "100 times"), and the losing symbol is The end condition of the first time saving state related to C is set that the number of special figure variable displays is performed 50 times (the number of executions of the special figure variable display is "50 times"). Further, in the high probability low base game state, when the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the halt display of the losing symbol C are performed, a second time saving state is set. Further, no end condition is set for the second time saving state. In other words, once the second time saving state is set, the second time saving state continues until a jackpot is won. In addition, in the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state, when the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C are performed, the same situation as in the first embodiment occurs. Similarly, the time saving state continues without being newly set.

Next, regarding the ease of opening (ease of opening) of the second starting port 12 in the first time saving state and the second time saving state, that is, the time saving state components relating to the first time saving state and the second time saving state. explain. In the fifth embodiment as well, the components related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (easiness of opening) in the time saving state are the winning probability related to the hit determination, the normal pattern variation time related to the normal pattern fluctuation display, There is also an opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game. Then, the hit determination is performed using the hit determination table, the determination of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern that determines the normal pattern fluctuation time is performed using the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game that the second starting port 12 opens is This is done using an auxiliary game control table. Each table is divided into a table used in a non-time saving state, a table used in a first time saving state, and a table used in a second time saving state.

FIG. 72(A) shows a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 72(B) shows a configuration example of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 72(C) shows an example of the configuration of the auxiliary game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72(A), when the hit determination table for the non-time saving state is used, a hit is determined with a probability of 6600/65536, and when the hit determination table for the first time saving state is used. is determined to be a hit with a probability of 50,000/65,536, and when the hit determination table for the second time saving state is used, it is determined to be a win with a probability of 59,936/65,536. Therefore, it is likely to be determined as a hit in the order of second time saving state>first time saving state>non time saving state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 72(B), when the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is used, the regular figure fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped, When the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used, the ordinary figure fluctuation time is determined to be 7 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped, and the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is determined. When a table is used, the ordinary figure fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped. Therefore, in the order of second time saving state > first time saving state > non-time saving state, the number of executions per unit time of the regular figure fluctuation display increases (execution frequency) increases.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72(C), when the auxiliary game control table for the non-time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds, and the first time saving state When the auxiliary game control table for the auxiliary game is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 3.5 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is used, the auxiliary game The opening time of the second starting port 12 is 5.0 seconds. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in one auxiliary game increases in the order of second time saving state>first time saving state>non time saving state.

In this way, depending on the game state (non-time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state) related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12, the hit determination table, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game The control table is different, and the winning probability is higher in the order of 2nd time saving state > 1st time saving state > non-time saving state, and the normal fluctuation time is higher in the order of 2nd time saving state > 1st time saving state > non time saving state. The opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is short, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is long in the order of second time saving state>first time saving state>non time saving state. As mentioned above, as the winning probability increases, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases, and as the regular pattern fluctuation time becomes shorter, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases. As the opening time of the starting port 12 becomes longer, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases. Therefore, in view of this, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases in the order of the second time saving state > the first time saving state > the non-time saving state, and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not ascertained by the player. It can be said that this is an advantageous gaming state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 needs to open the second starting port 12 at that time in order to select the hit determination table, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and auxiliary game control table associated with the type of time saving state. It is necessary to specify the gaming state related to ease. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the game state is a low probability low base game state or a high probability low base game state in the game state setting process after displaying small winning symbols (S1507). Check. If it is a low probability low base game state, in order to set the first time saving state, a time saving flag indicating that the first time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol (the first time saving state after the small winning symbol is displayed) is set. 1 Time saving flag) is turned on in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the first time saving state, and at the same time, a gaming state command indicating that the first time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol is sent to the gaming machine. Set in the output buffer of RAM 104. On the other hand, if it is a high probability low base game state, in order to set the second time saving state, a time saving flag indicating that the second time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol (the second time saving state after the small winning symbol is displayed) is set. At the same time, the second time saving state is set by turning ON the second time saving flag) in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104, and a gaming state command indicating that the second time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol is sent to the gaming machine. Set in the output buffer of RAM 104.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 checks whether the game state is a low probability low base game state or a high probability low base game state in the game state setting process after displaying losing symbols (S1509). Then, if it is a low probability low base game state, the game control microcomputer 101 next checks the losing symbol type that is stopped and displayed. Here, if the losing symbol type is losing symbol B, in order to set the first time saving state triggered by the stop display of losing symbol B, the first time saving state is triggered by the stop display of losing symbol B. A time saving flag indicating this (first time saving flag after losing symbol B is displayed) is turned on in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set a first time saving state, and the first time saving flag is triggered by the stop display of losing symbol B. A game status command indicating the status is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. On the other hand, if the losing symbol type is losing symbol C, in order to set the first time saving state triggered by the stopping display of losing symbol C, the first time saving state should be triggered by the stopping display of losing symbol C. A time-saving flag (first time-saving flag after display of losing symbol C) indicating the change in time is turned on in the time-saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set a first time-saving state, and the first time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of losing symbol C. A game status command indicating that the game is set is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, if it is a high probability low base game state, the game control microcomputer 101 next checks the losing symbol type that is stopped and displayed, and if the losing symbol type is losing symbol B, the losing symbol B is stopped. In order to set the second time-saving state triggered by the display, a time-saving flag indicating that the second time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B (second time-saving flag after displaying the losing symbol B) is stored in the gaming RAM 104. A time saving flag area is turned on to set a second time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the second time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. On the other hand, when the losing symbol type is losing symbol C, in order to set the second time saving state triggered by the stop display of losing symbol C, the second time saving state is triggered by the stop display of losing symbol C. The time saving flag (first time saving flag after displaying the losing symbol C) indicating this is turned on in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the first time saving state, and the second time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C. A game status command indicating that the game is set is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Therefore, when making a hit determination in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the first time saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol, the first time saving flag after displaying losing symbol B, and the first time reducing flag after displaying losing symbol C. When the first time saving flag is ON, the hit determination table for the first time saving state is selected, the second time saving flag is displayed after the small hit symbol is displayed, the second time saving flag is displayed after the losing symbol B is displayed, and the losing symbol C is displayed. When the second time saving flag is ON, a hit determination table for the second time saving state is selected. In addition, when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the first time saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol, the first time reducing flag after displaying losing symbol B, and the losing symbol. When the first time saving flag is turned on after C is displayed, select the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state, and select the second time saving flag after the small winning symbol is displayed and the second time saving flag after the losing symbol B is displayed. , and when the second time saving flag is turned ON after the losing symbol C is displayed, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected. Furthermore, when controlling the auxiliary game (opening the second starting port 12) in the auxiliary game control process of step S1105, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the first time saving flag and the losing symbol B after displaying the small winning symbol. When the first time saving flag and the first time saving flag after displaying the losing symbol C are ON, select the auxiliary game control table for the first time saving state, and after displaying the small winning symbol, the second time saving flag and the losing symbol. When the second time saving flag after B display and the second time saving flag after losing symbol C display are ON, the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is selected.

In addition, when the time-saving flag after the jackpot game state is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the hit determination table for the second time-saving state when making a hit determination in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, In the normal pattern standby process of step S1102, when performing the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected, and in the auxiliary game control process of step S1105, the auxiliary game is controlled ( When opening the second starting port 12), the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is selected. That is, when the time saving state is set according to the end of the jackpot game, the second time saving state is set.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the first time-saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol and the first time-saving flag after displaying the losing symbol B, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special symbol variable which is the prescribed number of time-saving times as a condition for ending the time-saving state. Set the display execution count "100 times" to the time saving remaining count counter. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the first time-saving flag after displaying the losing symbol C, the time-saving remaining number of executions of the special figure variable display, which is the prescribed number of time-saving times, is set as a condition for ending the time-saving state. Set in the number counter. In addition, since no end condition is set for the second time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the second time saving flag after the small winning symbol is displayed, the second time saving flag after the losing symbol B is displayed, and the second time reducing flag after the losing symbol C is displayed. When turning on the flag, the specified number of times of time saving is not set in the time saving remaining number of times counter. In addition, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the time-saving flag after the jackpot game state related to the jackpot symbols A, B, D, and E, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the prescribed number of time-savings to the remaining number-of-time-savings counter. When turning on the time-saving flag after the jackpot game state related to jackpot symbols C and F, set the number of executions of the special figure variable display, which is the prescribed number of time-savings, to "100 times" in the remaining time-savings counter. .

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, a game state in which the normal probability state is set as the game state related to the jackpot winning probability, and the first time saving state is set as the game state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12. is referred to as the "first low probability high base gaming state". Similarly, a gaming state in which a normal probability state is set and a second time saving state is set is referred to as a "second low probability high base gaming state", and a gaming state in which a high probability state is set and a second time saving state A gaming state in which is set is referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state".

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, in the second time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 50(B) ) is used, and in the first time-saving state related to the small winning symbol and the losing symbol B, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 51(A)) is used. , In the first time-saving state related to the losing symbol C, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 51(B)) is used.

Next, characteristic parts of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment described based on FIG. 63 and parts common to the game flow according to the fourth embodiment described based on FIG. 70 will be omitted. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, when a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, in the normal presentation mode, the presentations by the first normal presentation stage, the second normal presentation stage, and the third normal presentation stage are performed. During execution, the flow from the stop display of the jackpot symbol G to the setting of the high probability low base game state and the setting of the hidden production mode, and the stop display of the jackpot symbol H are performed. The flow from when the low probability low base game state is set to when the hidden production mode is set is the same as in the fourth embodiment.

Then, in the high probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol G or the low probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, and in the hidden production mode, perform a left hit to win the first starting opening 11, and special symbol 1 When the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is performed in a situation where a game that executes a variable display is performed, the first jackpot game is executed and the first jackpot game ends, as in the case of the normal game state. Accordingly, the game shifts to a high-probability, high-base game state, and also shifts to a probability-variable production mode. Similarly, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed, the second jackpot game is executed, and the probability increases as the second jackpot game ends. At the same time as transitioning to a high base gaming state, the game transitions to a variable probability performance mode. In addition, in the high probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol G or the low probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, and in the hidden performance mode, perform a left hit to win the first starting opening 11 and win the special symbol 1. When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed in a situation where a game that executes a variable display is performed, the third jackpot game is executed and the third jackpot game ends, as in the case of the normal game state. Accordingly, a second time saving state in which the prescribed number of time saving times as an end condition is 100 times is set, and the game shifts to a low probability high base game state, and at the same time shifts to a time saving performance mode. In addition, in the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the third jackpot game, the first jackpot performance mode is set, and the opening performance, round performance, and ending performance according to each jackpot game are executed. This first jackpot effect mode is the same as the jackpot effect mode of the first embodiment.

In addition, in a low probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, and in a situation where a game is being played in which a left hit is made in the hidden production mode to win the first starting opening 11 and the special symbol 1 variable display is executed, When the stop display of the losing symbol B and the stop display of the small winning symbol are performed, a first time saving state in which the specified number of time saving times is 100 is set according to the stop display, and a first low probability high base game state is set. At the same time as transitioning to super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed, a first time saving state in which the specified number of time saving times is 50 is set in accordance with the stop display, and a transition is made to a first low probability high base gaming state, and Shift to chance mode.

On the other hand, in a high probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol G, and in a situation where a game is being played in which a left hit is made in the hidden production mode to win the first starting opening 11 and the special symbol 1 variable display is executed, When the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C are performed, the end condition, specifically, the second A time saving state is set and a transition is made to a high probability high base game state, and at the same time, a transition is made to a probability variable performance mode.

In this way, when the small winning symbols or losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the low probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H and in the latent production mode, the first time saving state is set in accordance with the stopped display. , the game shifts to the first low probability high base gaming state, and also shifts to the super chance mode or the short chance mode. On the other hand, when the small winning symbol or the losing symbol B, C is stopped and displayed in the high probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol G and in the latent production mode, the second start is started more than the first time saving state according to the stopped display. A second time-saving state in which the ease of opening the mouth 12 is high, in other words, a second time-saving state advantageous to the player is set, and a transition is made to a high-probability, high-base game state, and also to a probability-variable performance mode.

In addition, when the small winning symbol or the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed in the low probability low base game state and the latent production mode, in the special symbol fluctuation production, the "small winning symbol" is finally displayed as shown in FIG. The stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a mode (first special mode) that suggests a hit and a loss of the losing symbol B and also suggests that a super chance mode is set. On the other hand, when the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed in the low probability low base game state and the latent production mode, in the special symbol variation production, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests that the short chance mode is set (second special mode). However, in the high-probability low-base game state and in the latent production mode, if the small winning symbols and losing symbols B and C are displayed in a static manner, in the special pattern variation production, the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C will eventually be displayed. The stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is carried out in a manner that suggests a loss and that the variable probability performance mode is set. In the fifth embodiment, a super chance mode suggestion image is used as a "mode that suggests a small hit and a loss of losing symbols B and C, and also suggests that a variable probability production mode is set" regarding production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. As in the case of G32 and short chance mode suggestion image G33, the image in which the left effect pattern EZ1 includes the characters "probability variable effect" (left probability variable effect mode suggestion image), and the image in which the medium effect pattern EZ2 includes the characters "mode" (medium) (probable variable production mode suggestion image) and an image in which the right production pattern EZ3 includes the characters "rush" (right probability variation production mode suggestion image).

In addition, the latent production mode related to the high probability low base game state will continue unless a jackpot is won, but the latent production mode related to the low probability low base game state will be executed 100 times. When this happens, the game ends and shifts from hidden performance mode to normal performance mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment, the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the low probability low base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol H and in the latent performance mode. In response to the stop display, the first time saving state is set, and the mode shifts to the super chance mode or the short chance mode. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment, when the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the high probability low base gaming state related to the jackpot symbol G and in the latent performance mode, In other words, the second time saving state is set in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than the first time saving state, which is advantageous to the player, and the transition to the high probability high base gaming state, and the hidden performance mode. Shifts to a different fixed variation production mode. In short, when staying in the same non-time-saving state regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12 and the same latent performance mode in which it is difficult to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state, small winning symbols and When the losing symbols B and C are displayed in a stopped state, the set time saving state and production mode differ depending on the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) related to the jackpot winning probability. Therefore, the gameplay becomes more sophisticated and the interest in the game increases.

Furthermore, when the player is staying in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player, a second time saving state is set in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It becomes more intense and the game's interest further increases. Furthermore, the end condition of the first time saving state related to the stop display of the small winning symbol and the stop display of the losing symbol B in the low probability low base gaming state is the number of times the special symbol variable display is executed "100 times", and the low probability low The end condition for the first time-saving state related to the stop display of losing symbols C in the base gaming state is the number of times the special pattern variable display is executed, whereas the stoppage of small winning symbols in the high probability low base gaming state There is no end condition for the second time saving state related to the display, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C. That is, regarding the end conditions, the second time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state. In this way, when the player is staying in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player, the second time saving state where the ending condition is advantageous to the player is set, so the ups and downs in the gameplay become more intense and the game becomes more interesting. further improves.

(Example of modification of fifth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the modified example of the first embodiment and the modified example of the fourth embodiment can also be applied to the fifth embodiment as appropriate within a consistent range (a consistent range). In the fifth embodiment, when the stop display of loss symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol are performed in the high probability low base game state, the same second time saving state is set in accordance with the stop display. For all or part of these stop displays, a different time-saving state for both or one of the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 and the termination condition may not be set. In this case, in all of the time saving states after the stop display of loss symbols B and C and the stop display of small winning symbols in the high probability low base game state, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 and Both or one of the ending conditions may be set to be advantageous to the player. Alternatively, part of the time saving state after the stop display of losing symbols B and C and the stop display of small winning symbols in the high probability low base game state is determined by the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 and/or the termination condition. The player may have an advantage over the first time-saving state in terms of the first time-saving state, but the player may be at a disadvantage compared to the first time-saving state regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12 and/or both or one of the termination conditions.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 in the time saving state according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol in the high probability low base game state and the ending conditions are as follows. , the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 in the time-saving state according to the end of the first jackpot game, and the second jackpot game, and the ease of opening of the second starting port 12, which is set to be the same as the ending condition. , and/or the termination condition may be set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 in the time-saving state in response to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol in the high probability low base game state and the ending condition are both or one of the If it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player compared to the time-saving state that corresponds to the end of the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game, the time-saver will be reduced according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol. In the state, a special performance mode may be set for the time saving state instead of the variable probability performance mode.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 in the time saving state according to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in the high probability low base game state and the stop display of the small winning symbol, and the ending conditions are as follows. , the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 in the time saving state according to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in the low probability low base game state and the stop display of the small winning symbol, and the ending conditions are set to be different. However, for the stop display of all symbols or the stop display of some symbols, both or one of the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 and the termination condition may be set to be the same. The ease of opening the second starting port 12 in the time saving state according to all or part of the stop display of losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol in the high probability low base gaming state is the low probability low base gaming state. If it is the same as the time saving state corresponding to all or part of the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol will be changed. In the corresponding time saving state, the same performance mode (super chance mode or short chance mode) as in the low probability low base gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the second time saving state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state in terms of ease of opening the second starting port 12 and termination conditions. , only one of them may be advantageous to the player. In this case, regarding the other, the first time saving state may be made to be the same as the second time saving state, or the first time saving state may be more advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, all the time saving state components are configured so that the second time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state, but only some of the time saving state components are The second time saving state may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state. In this case, the super chance mode or short chance mode may be set even in the time saving state corresponding to the stop display of small winning symbols or the stop display of loss symbols B and C in the high probability low base game state. . In addition, although no end conditions are set for the time saving states corresponding to the stop display of loss symbols B and C and the stop display of small winning symbols in the high probability low base game state, all or some of these time saver states Regarding the status, termination conditions may be set. In this case, even if it is the same as the time saving state according to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in the low probability low base gaming state and the stopping display of the small winning symbol, the losing symbols B and C in the low probability low base gaming state It may be made to be advantageous to the player or disadvantageous to the player compared to the case of the time saving state corresponding to the stop display of the small winning symbol and the stop display of the small winning symbol.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the aforementioned basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. Below, as a sixth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment and the first embodiment will be mainly described. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or similar configurations.

In the sixth embodiment, the main points are that the gate 13 is also provided on the first flow path R1 in the left gaming area 6A, that there is no small hit as a result of the jackpot judgment, and that the time saving state This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the type of losing symbol that can cause a loss is not set to special figure 1, but is set to special figure 2.

FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board unit YU of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 74, the gate 13 is provided not only on the second flow path R2 in the right game area 6B but also on the first flow path R1 in the left game area 6A. Although not shown, a series of game ball paths are formed from the gate 13 provided in the left game area 6A to the first starting port 11. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 provided in the left gaming area 6A may enter the first starting opening 11 after that. Therefore, in the normal gaming state (normal production mode), when a game ball is hitting the left hand with the aim of winning into the first starting slot 11, the game ball passes through the gate 13, a hit determination is made, and the player wins. As a result of winning and the stop display of the winning symbol, an auxiliary game may be performed and the second starting port 12 may be opened.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, a series of game ball paths to the second starting port 12 are also formed in the left game area 6A. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal production mode), by hitting the ball to the left, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the open second starting port 12.

In the sixth embodiment, when the second starting opening 12 is open in the normal gaming state (normal production mode), the non-time saving state is set so that the player can win the second starting opening 12. The opening time of the second starting port 12 related to the auxiliary game in is set to a time that allows the player to enter the second starting port 12 to win a prize. FIG. 75 shows an auxiliary game control table according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 75, in the sixth embodiment, the number of times the second starting port 12 is opened for the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is set to two, and the total opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to 5.0 seconds. ing. Specifically, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the second starting port 12 is opened for 2.5 seconds the first time, is closed once, and then opened for the second time with an interval of 1.5 seconds in between. .Open for 5 seconds.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball may pass through the gate 13 in a situation where the player is aiming to enter the first starting port 11 in the non-time saving state, and the second starting point related to the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state The opening time of the starting hole 12 is set to a time that allows the player to win the second starting hole 12, so in the normal gaming state, the special drawing 2 jackpot determination is carried out naturally and the special drawing is won. 2 variable display may be performed. In addition, as will be described later, in the normal game state, when the special figure 2 variable display is started, a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode is set. The special performance mode ends when the special figure 2 variable display based on winning in the second starting port 12 related to one auxiliary game ends. When the special performance mode ends, it returns to the normal performance mode.

Next, jackpot determination and loss symbol type determination according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 76(A) shows an example of the configuration of the special pattern 1 jackpot determination table, and FIG. 76(B) shows a configuration example of the special pattern 2 jackpot determination table. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, "small hit" is not provided as the determination result of the jackpot determination, specifically, the determination result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination and the determination result of the special figure 2 jackpot determination. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the time saving state is not set in response to the stop display of the small winning symbol. Note that the jackpot winning probability is set to be the same as in the first embodiment in both the normal probability state and the high probability state. In the first embodiment, the special symbol determination value that was assigned to "small win" is assigned to "loss" as is.

Moreover, FIG. 76(C) shows a configuration example of a losing symbol type determination table. As shown in FIG. 76(C), in the sixth embodiment, contrary to the first embodiment, one type of losing symbol is provided for special pattern 1, and three types of losing symbols are provided for special pattern 2. Types are provided. Loss pattern A related to special pattern 1 in the sixth embodiment and loss pattern D related to special pattern 2 are the same as loss pattern A related to special pattern 1 and loss pattern D related to special pattern 2 in the first embodiment. It is composed of That is, the time saving state is not set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol A and the stop display of the losing symbol D. On the other hand, the losing pattern E related to the special figure 2 in the sixth embodiment corresponds to the losing pattern B related to the special figure 1 in the first embodiment, and the losing pattern F related to the special figure 2 in the sixth embodiment corresponds to the losing pattern E related to the special figure 2 in the sixth embodiment. It corresponds to the losing symbol C related to the special drawing 1 in one embodiment, and a time saving state may be set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E and the stop display of the losing symbol F.

The details will be described later, but in the normal gaming state, in other words, in the low base gaming state, when the stop display of the losing symbol E and the stop display of the losing symbol F are performed, the time saving state is set according to the stop display. However, in the high base gaming state, even if the stop display of the losing symbol E and the stop display of the losing symbol F are performed, a new time saving state is not set.

Next, special figure fluctuation pattern determination according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. In the first embodiment, for the special figure 1 variation pattern, different special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables are used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state, and for the special figure 2 variation pattern, different special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables are used for the non-time saving state and the time saving state. state, in the time-saving state after a jackpot game, in the time-saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, and in the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and in the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C. Different special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables were used at different times. In the sixth embodiment, for the special figure 1 variation pattern, different special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables are used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state, and for the special figure 2 variation pattern, different special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables are used for the non-time saving state. Special figure 2 that is different in the state, in the time-saving state after the jackpot game, in the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol E, and in the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol F. A variation pattern determination table is used. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is associated with the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12, and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes the special figure 1 variation pattern determination for the non-time saving state. There are a table and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated not only with the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 but also with the trigger for the time-saving state. special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time-saving state after jackpot game state (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for jackpot time-saving state), and time-saving after losing symbol E stop display Special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for time-saving state of losing symbol E) and special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for time-saving state after losing symbol F stop display (losing symbol F There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time-saving conditions.

FIG. 77(A) is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a non-time saving state, FIG. 77(B) is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a time saving state, and FIG. A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 78(B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state, and FIG. 79(A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time-saving state, and FIG. 79(B) is a configuration example of the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol F time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 77(A) and FIG. 77(B), both the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state include The special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is not provided. This is because, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, a "small hit" is not provided as a determination result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination. Furthermore, for both the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state, there is one type of special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing. This is because, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, there is only one type of losing symbol related to the special figure 1, "losing symbol A".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state includes, in addition to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol D, the special symbol 2 variable pattern determination table for the losing symbol E. There is also a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for losing symbols F, and three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables are provided as special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables related to losses. This is because, as mentioned above, in the sixth embodiment, there are three types of losing symbols related to the special drawing 2: "losing symbols D", "losing symbols E", and "losing symbols F", and losing symbols in the non-time saving state. Since the time saving state is set according to the stop display of E and the stop display of the losing symbol F, the variable display related to the special figure 2 ensures time to execute the performance to excite the players. It is. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol E has the same structure as the special symbol 1 varying pattern determination table for losing symbol B in the non-time saving state of the first embodiment, and the special symbol 2 variation pattern determining table for losing symbol E The 2 variation pattern determination table is configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol C in the non-time saving state of the first embodiment. That is, in the non-time-saving state, when the special figure 2 variation display related to the losing symbol E is being performed, the same effect as the special symbol varying effect related to the losing symbol B in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 61). ), when the special figure 2 variable display related to the losing pattern F is being performed, the same effect as the special pattern variable effect related to the losing pattern C in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 62).

As shown in FIG. 78 (B), FIG. 79 (A), and FIG. , loss symbol E, and loss symbol F) are associated with each other, but only one type of special figure 2 variation pattern determination veil for the time-saving state related to loss is provided. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each time-saving state is basically configured in the same manner as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each time-saving state of the first embodiment.

Next, a gaming state setting table for newly setting (changing) a gaming state will be explained. When the game state is newly set (changed) in response to the end of the jackpot game state, the game state is changed based on the game state setting table shown in FIG. 15(B), as in the basic embodiment. A state is set, and an end condition related to the game state is set. When the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stopped display of losing symbols, the gaming state is basically newly set (changed) based on the gaming state setting table.

When the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stop display of losing symbols, the gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols) shows the stop display of losing symbols in the non-time saving state. A gaming state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols when a losing symbol is stopped (game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stopping display) and a gaming state for displaying a losing symbol stopping display when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed in a time saving state. There is a setting table (gaming state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display). FIG. 80(A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display, and FIG. 80(B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display. That is, the gaming state is associated with the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols.

Furthermore, the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display includes a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display when it is a losing symbol E (gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol E stop display), There is a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display (non-time-saving losing symbol F stop display gaming state setting table) when it is a losing symbol F, and the gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display. , a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display when the losing symbol is E (game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol E stop display), and a gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display when the losing symbol is F. (Game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol F stop display). That is, in the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols, the gaming state and the losing symbol type are associated.

As shown in FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B), according to the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol E stop display and the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol F stop display, the stopping of losing symbol E The time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol F, but according to the game state setting table for time saving losing symbol E stop display and the gaming state setting table for time saving losing symbol F stop display, the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E. The time saving state is not set in response to the stop display and the stop display of the losing symbol F.

In this way, the jackpot determination result is associated with the gaming state setting table for newly setting (changing) the gaming state. Further, symbol types are associated with the gaming state setting table relating to jackpots and the gaming state setting table relating to losses.

Further, when the time saving state is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non-time saving state, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "150 times of special symbol variable display". That is, the time-saving state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 150 times without winning a jackpot, and the state becomes a non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol F in the non-time saving state, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special symbol variable display 50 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot, and the state becomes a non-time-saving gaming state.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs in processing content from the first embodiment, will be described. The processes that are different from the first embodiment are special motion processing, special symbol standby processing in special motion processing, special symbol 1 determination processing, special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing, special symbol 2 determination processing, and special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination. processing, and special symbol confirmation processing in the special operation processing.

First, special operation processing according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 81 shows a flowchart of special operation processing according to the sixth embodiment. In the special operation process according to the sixth embodiment, the process regarding the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big winning device 14D is divided into six statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8" is assigned to each of these statuses. As shown in FIG. 81, in the first embodiment, the special operation process according to the sixth embodiment is a game state setting process after displaying the small winning symbol of special operation status = 6 included in the special operation status (S1507). , and the special operation process according to the first embodiment except that the small winning game control process (S1508) with special operation status=7 is not included. This is because in the sixth embodiment, a "small win" is not provided as a result of the jackpot determination.

Next, special figure 1 determination processing according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process according to the sixth embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 82, the special figure 1 determination process according to the sixth embodiment is the process related to the small hit that was performed in the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment, specifically, the process related to the small hit performed in the first embodiment. Same as the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment except that S1630 to S1632 in the special figure 1 determination process according to the form are not performed and the process proceeds to step S1633 if it is determined in step S1625 that it is not a jackpot. It is configured. In addition, since only one type of losing symbol A is set for the special drawing 1, in step S1635, a symbol type flag indicating losing symbol A is set, and in step S1636, a symbol type flag indicating losing symbol A is set. A symbol designation command is set.

Next, special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 83 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment includes the process related to the small hit that was performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment, and the losing symbol B , C, specifically, if S1646 to S1647 and S1653 to S1655 in the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment are not performed and it is determined that it is not a jackpot in step S1644, the process proceeds to step S1649. Except for proceeding, the structure is similar to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment.

Continuing, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. Flowcharts of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment are shown in FIGS. 84 to 85. As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1680 that the game state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 is currently in the non-time saving state. Determine whether or not. If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time saving state, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state in step S1681, and proceeds to step S1687.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1680 that the time saving state is not a non-time saving state, that is, the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the type of the time saving flag, which will be described later, in step S1682, and indicates that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game. Determine whether the state is the same or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time-saving state is a time-saving state after a jackpot game, in step S1683, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time-saving state, and proceeds to step S1687.

If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1682 that the time-saving state is not after the jackpot gaming state, it checks the type of the time-saving flag in step S1684, and changes the time-saving state to the time-saving state after the loss symbol E stop display. Determine whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is a time saving state after the losing symbol E stop display, in step S1685, it selects the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time saving state, While proceeding to step S1687, if it is determined that the time saving state is not after the losing symbol E stop display, that is, the time saving state is after the losing symbol F stop display, in step S1686, the special symbol 2 variation pattern for the losing symbol F time saving state A determination table is selected and the process advances to step S1687.

In step S1687, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like to determine whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1688, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the following in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for jackpot is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1697. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special pattern 2 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, that is, it is a loss, it checks the symbol type flag etc. in step S1689, and confirms the special pattern 2 loss symbol type determination result. It is determined whether it is a losing symbol D or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination result is the losing symbol D, it performs reach determination in step S1690. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special drawing 2 pending storage unit 105b, and uses that reach random number as the current gaming state (non-time saving). It is determined whether there is a reach or there is no reach by comparing it with a reach determination table according to the state (state/time saving state).

In step S1691, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the result of the reach determination is "with reach". If the result of the reach determination is that there is a reach, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1692 that the losing symbol D is selected in the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686. Selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table with reach associated with , and proceeds to step S1697. On the other hand, if the result of the reach determination is not that there is a reach, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current number of reserved special drawings 2 in step S1693, and selects it in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686. Among the special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables, a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no reach that is associated with the losing symbol D and corresponds to the number of reserved special figure 2 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1697.

In addition, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1689 that the result of the special pattern 2 losing symbol type determination is not the losing symbol D, in step S1694 it checks the symbol type flag etc. It is determined whether the result of the type determination is a losing symbol E or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination is the losing symbol E, in step S1695, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 2 variation pattern selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686. Select the special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table for losing pattern E from the table, proceed to step S1697, and determine that the result of the special pattern 2 losing pattern type determination is not the losing pattern E, that is, it is the losing pattern F. Then, in step S1696, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol F is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1697.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in steps S1688, S1692, S1693, S1695, and S1696, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in step S1697. Perform pattern judgment. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, and selects the special figure variation pattern. The pattern random number is compared with the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure 2 variation pattern.

Subsequently, in step S1698, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern in the output buffer, and in step S1699, sets the special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, special symbol confirmation processing according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the sixth embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 86, the special symbol confirmation process according to the sixth embodiment is the process related to the small hit that was performed in the special symbol confirmation process according to the first embodiment, specifically, If S1762 to S1763 in the special symbol confirmation process are not performed and it is determined in step S1758 that it is not a jackpot, the process advances to step S1764, and in step S1764, it is determined whether the losing symbols E and F are stopped and displayed. Other than this, the configuration is similar to the special symbol confirmation process according to the first embodiment.

Here, the game state setting process after losing symbol display (S1509) will be explained. As described above, when the special operation status is "8", the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying a losing symbol. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving state based on the gaming state at that time and the type of losing symbols in the gaming state setting process after displaying losing symbols. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the game is in a non-time saving state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game is in a non-time saving state, it next checks the losing symbol type that is being stopped and displayed. Here, if the losing symbol type is losing symbol E, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the gaming state setting table for losing symbol E associated with the non-time saving state (gaming state setting for non-time saving losing symbol E stop display). Set the gaming state based on the table). As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving state in which the termination condition is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150 times". In detail, in order to set the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E, a time saving flag (time saving flag after losing symbol E is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E is set. A time saving flag area of a gaming RAM 104 is turned on to set a time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of a losing symbol E is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the number of executions of the special figure variable display, which is the prescribed number of times of time-saving, "150 times" in the time-saving remaining number of times counter as a condition for ending the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the losing symbol type is the losing symbol F, the gaming control microcomputer 101 controls the gaming state setting table for the losing symbol F associated with the non-time saving state (game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol F stop display). ) Set the gaming state based on. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving state in which the termination condition is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50 times". In detail, in order to set the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol F, a time saving flag (time saving flag after losing symbol F is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol F is set. A time saving flag area of a gaming RAM 104 is turned on to set a time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of a losing symbol F is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the number of executions of the special figure variable display, which is the prescribed number of time-savings, "50 times" in the remaining time-savings counter as a condition for ending the time-saving state.

In addition, when it is determined that the game control microcomputer 101 is not in a non-time-saving state, the game state is set based on the game state setting table for losing symbols associated with the time-saving state (gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display). Set. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 does not newly set a game state. In detail, the game control microcomputer 101 does not set the time saving state when the losing symbol E is stopped or the losing symbol F is stopped. Do not set. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 does not perform any processing on the remaining time saving counter.

Then, whether the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in a non-time saving state or not in a non-time saving state, it ultimately changes the special operation status to "1" and displays the losing symbol. The post-gaming state setting process ends.

Next, characteristic parts of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment described based on FIG. 63 will be omitted. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment. As mentioned above, in the sixth embodiment, when the game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, in the normal presentation mode, the first normal presentation stage, the second normal presentation stage, and the third normal presentation are performed. Even if a stop display of a loss is executed while a stage performance is being performed, a time saving state is set and the performance mode is not changed. In addition, similarly to the first embodiment, when the jackpot symbols A and B are stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the jackpot game is executed (the game is executed in the jackpot game state), and the jackpot After the performance in the performance mode is executed, the game transitions to a high probability high base game state and also to the variable probability performance mode, and when the jackpot symbol C is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed (jackpot game state At the same time, after the game is executed in the jackpot performance mode, the game shifts to a low probability high base game state and also shifts to the time saving performance mode.

In addition, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, since the gate 13 is also provided on the first flow path R1 in the left gaming area 6A, it is possible to win a special prize at the second starting port 12 in the normal gaming state. It is possible to perform two variable displays. As explained in the basic embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display. Therefore, for example, if the second starting port 12 opens while the special drawing 1 variable display is being executed (the auxiliary game is being executed) and a prize is won in the second starting port 12 while the special drawing 1 variable display is being executed, the special drawing 1 will be displayed. After the variable display ends, the special figure 2 variable display will be executed based on the winning in the second starting port 12 during the opening. In the sixth embodiment, in response to the start of the special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state, the normal effect mode that had been set up until then shifts to the special effect mode. A detailed explanation of the performance in the special performance mode will be omitted, but for example, in the special performance mode, a background image dedicated to the special performance mode is displayed on the display unit 50a, as in the variable performance mode and the time-saving performance mode, and the special performance mode is BGM dedicated to the production mode is output from the speaker 52. In addition, in the special performance mode, reach performances (SP reach, L reach) and preview performances exclusive to the special performance mode are performed. In addition, the special effect mode is the last special figure 2 variable based on the winning in the second starting hole 12 performed while the second starting hole 12 is open (during the execution of the auxiliary game) which triggers the special effect mode. It ends when the display ends. Then, in response to the end of the special performance mode, the normal performance mode is returned to.

When the special figure 2 variable display is executed in the normal gaming state and the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed while the special effect mode is being executed, the prescribed number of times for time reduction is 150 times according to the stop display. Then, a time-saving state in which the losing symbol E time-saving state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used is set, and the game shifts to a low-probability, high-base game state, and at the same time, shifts to a super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing symbol F is performed, a time saving state is set in which the prescribed number of times of time saving is 50 and the special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol F time saving state is used, according to the stop display. At the same time, the game enters a low-probability, high-base gaming state, and also enters a short-chance mode.

In this way, in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), when the stop display of the losing symbol E or the losing symbol F is performed as the final result display of the special symbol 2 variable display, the low probability high base gaming state A new low-probability, high-base gaming state is set, and a super chance mode and short chance mode are newly set. However, in the low probability high base gaming state or the high probability high base gaming state (time saving state), even if the stop display of losing symbol E or losing symbol F is performed as the final result display of special symbol 2 variable display, A time saving state is not newly set, nor is a super chance mode or a short chance mode newly set, and the game state and production mode at that time continue as they are.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display is executed in the normal game state and the stop display of the jackpot symbol F is performed while the special effect mode is being executed, the jackpot game state changes according to the stop display. At the same time, the game shifts to jackpot performance mode. Then, as in the case of the stop display of the jackpot symbol C in the first embodiment, in response to the end of the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol F, the prescribed number of time reductions is 100, and the number of times for the jackpot time reduction state is A time-saving state in which the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used is set, and the game shifts to a low-probability, high-base game state, and at the same time, shifts to a time-saving production mode. In addition, when the stop display of the jackpot symbols D and E is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also shifts to the jackpot production mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, as in the case of the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern for the jackpot time saving state is applied according to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbols D and E. A time-saving state in which a determination table is used is set, and a transition is made to a high-probability, high-base game state, and at the same time, a transition is made to a probability-variable performance mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment, when the stop display of losing symbols E and F is performed in the non-time saving state which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the time saving state is changed according to the stop display. is set, but even if the stop display of losing symbols E and F is performed in a time saving state that is relatively advantageous to the player, a new time saving state is set according to the stop display, or the time saving state ends. Conditions will not be extended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a non-time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, thereby improving the game's interest, and preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

(Example of modification of the sixth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. Note that modifications of the modifications of the first embodiment can also be applied to the sixth embodiment as appropriate within a consistent range (a range where consistency can be achieved). In the sixth embodiment, the special figure 2 losing symbol types that cause the time saving state are two losing symbols E and F, but there may be three or more types. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be varied depending on the losing symbol type. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the special pattern 1 losing symbol type includes only losing symbols that do not cause a time-saving state, but like the special pattern 2 losing symbol type, a losing symbol type that causes a time-saving state is provided. It's okay. In this case, in the time-saving state, the same special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern determination table as any special pattern 2 losing symbol type that causes the time-saving state may be used, or the same special symbol 2-losing symbol type that causes the time-saving state may be used. You may use a different special figure 1 variation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the determination result of the special figure 2 jackpot determination does not include a small win, but a small win may be included so that a small win can be won even in the special figure 2 jackpot determination. In this case, the time saving state may be set upon completion of the stop display of the small winning symbol. Furthermore, in the time saving state in this case, the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table as in the time saving state triggered by the end of the stop display of the losing symbol related to special figure 2 may be used, or a different special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used. A table may also be used.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of types of small winning symbols may be provided. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be varied depending on the type of small winning symbol. Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state may always occur after the stoppage display. Alternatively, even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the time saving state may not occur after the stop display. That is, the small winning symbols may include a type of small winning symbol that causes a time saving state and a type of small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state. Alternatively, only small winning symbols that do not cause a time saving state may be provided.

Also, instead of generating a time-saving state by deriving losing symbols as a jackpot determination result by jackpot determination and then deriving losing symbols E and F as losing symbol type determination results by determining loss symbol type, for example, , a determination as to whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) may be made before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is determined by generating a time-saving state and not generating a time-saving state. The time saving determination may be performed by comparing the time saving determination table with an appropriately allocated time saving determination table. Then, when it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this case, even if the losing symbols are different between the case where the judgment result that the time saving state will occur in the time saving judgment is derived and the judgment result that the judgment result that the time saving state does not occur in the time saving judgment is derived. good. Furthermore, when a determination result that a time saving state is generated in the time saving determination is derived, the type of losing symbol is further determined from among a plurality of types, and the jackpot symbol type determination according to the sixth embodiment is performed. Like the losing symbol type determination, the special symbol variation pattern determination table and the specified time saving number (termination condition) used in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of the losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol E and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol F shift to different production modes, but they shift to the same production mode. You can do it like this. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, different prescribed times of time saving are set for the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol E and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol F, but the same number of times is set. A prescribed number of time saving times may be set. Furthermore, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol E, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol F, and the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 are set to be the same, but they are set to be different. You can also set it.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display is executed in the normal game state, the effect in the special effect mode is executed, but the effect does not shift to the special effect mode, and the normal effect mode continues as it is. The performance may be executed.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the aforementioned basic embodiment, first embodiment, and sixth embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the seventh embodiment will be mainly described with respect to its differences from the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations or similarly corresponding configurations as in the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations or similarly corresponding configurations as in the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment.

In the seventh embodiment, the game board unit YU shown in FIG. 74 is used as in the sixth embodiment. That is, a gate 13 is also provided on the first flow path R1 in the left gaming area 6A, and in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 12 is opened and winnings are made to the second starting port 12, and a special prize is entered. 2 variable display may be performed.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state is not set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol related to the special figure 1, and the losing symbol related to the special symbol 2 in the non-time-saving state is not set. Although the time saving state may be set in response to the stop display of , unlike the case of the sixth embodiment, the remaining number of time saving states related to the time saving state is set in accordance with the stop display of the losing symbol related to special drawing 2 in the time saving state. (the duration of the time-saving state may be extended).

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, only the losing symbol E is provided as the losing symbol type related to the special drawing 2 for which a time-saving state can be set, and the time-saving state that is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E is provided. The ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12), specifically, the time saving state components are set the same as in the sixth embodiment, but the losing symbol E Different from the sixth embodiment, the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state that is set according to the stop display is set to "100 times", which is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed. Also, as in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the special effect 2 variable display is started in the non-time saving state, the special effect mode is set, and when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the special effect mode, the second The process shifts to the super chance mode described in the sixth embodiment.

Next, a losing symbol type determination table according to the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 88 shows a configuration example of a losing symbol type determination table according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the seventh embodiment, for the special figure 2, either the losing symbol D or the losing symbol E is determined as the losing symbol type in the losing symbol type determination. Basically, this losing pattern D corresponds to the losing pattern D of the sixth embodiment, and is a losing pattern that cannot generate a time saving state, and this losing pattern E corresponds to the losing pattern D of the sixth embodiment. It corresponds to symbol E, and is a losing symbol that can cause a time-saving state. Note that the jackpot determination table and the jackpot symbol type determination table are the same as in the sixth embodiment.

Next, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to the seventh embodiment will be explained. In the seventh embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern differs in the non-time saving state, the time saving state after the jackpot game, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol E. A two-variation pattern determination table is used. In other words, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated not only with the gaming state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 but also with the timing of the time-saving state, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the timing of the time-saving state. special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the time-saving state after the jackpot game state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the jackpot time-saving state), and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the time-saving state after the jackpot game state, and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the time-saving state after the losing symbol E is stopped. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time-saving state).

FIGS. 89 to 90 show configuration examples of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 89(A) is an example of the configuration of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 89(B) is an example of the configuration of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state, and FIG. is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time saving state. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state in FIG. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time-saving state of 89(B) corresponds to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time-saving state according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 77(B)), and the table shown in FIG. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time-saving state corresponds to the special symbol 2 varying pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time-saving state (FIG. 78(A)) according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 89(A), FIG. 89(B), and FIG. 90, each special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is not provided with a special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for losing symbols F. This is because, as described above, in the seventh embodiment, "losing symbol F" is not provided as a determination result for determining the losing symbol type. It should be noted that each special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured in the same manner as the sixth embodiment except that the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for losing symbols F is not provided.

Next, a gaming state setting table for newly setting (changing) a gaming state will be explained. When newly setting (changing) the gaming state in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, as in the case of the basic embodiment, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 15(C). A state is set, and an end condition related to the game state is set. When the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stop display of losing symbols, the gaming state is basically newly set (changed) based on the gaming state setting table.

When the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stop display of losing symbols, the gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols) shows the stop display of losing symbols in the non-time saving state. A gaming state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols when a losing symbol is stopped (game state setting table for displaying a non-time-saving losing symbol) and a gaming state setting table for displaying a losing symbol when a losing symbol is stopped in a low-probability, high-base gaming state. There is a game state setting table for display (a game state setting table for low probability time saving loss symbol stop display). FIG. 91(A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display, and FIG. 91(B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for low probability time-saving loss symbol stop display. That is, the gaming state is associated with the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, a plurality of losing symbol types are not provided, so a gaming state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display and a gaming state setting table for low probability time saving losing symbol stopping display are provided. is not associated with a losing symbol type, but is associated with a jackpot determination result called a losing symbol (loss).

In addition, when the time saving state is set using the game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display, that is, the time saving state is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non-time saving state. In this case, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special figure variable display 80 times". On the other hand, when the time saving state is set using the low probability time saving losing symbol stop display game state setting table, that is, in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state, the time saving state is set. When is set, the end condition of the time-saving state is set to "special figure variable display 40 times". In addition, as described later, in the low probability high base game state, a time saving state is set, and in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state, the state returns to the non-time saving state once. Strictly speaking, the time saving state will not be newly set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state, and the time saving state will continue. , as will be described later, the remaining number of times the time saving state will continue may increase, that is, the duration of the time saving state may be extended. Therefore, for convenience, the increase in the remaining number of time savings related to this time saving state (extension of the duration of the time saving state) is also regarded as "setting of the time saving state", and the increased remaining number of time saving times (the number of executions of the special figure variable display) is positioned as the "time saving specified number of times".

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs in processing content from the sixth embodiment, will be described. Processes that are different from the sixth embodiment are a special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process, a special symbol confirmation process, and a game state setting process after losing symbol display.

First, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the seventh embodiment will be described. A flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the seventh embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 92, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1680 whether the game state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 is currently a non-time saving state. Determine whether or not. If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time saving state, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state in step S1681, and proceeds to step S1685.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1680 that the time saving state is not a non-time saving state, that is, the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the type of the time saving flag, which will be described later, in step S1682, and indicates that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game. Determine whether or not the state is the same. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time-saving state is a time-saving state after a jackpot game, in step S1683, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time-saving state, and proceeds to step S1685.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1682 that the time-saving state is not after the jackpot game state, it selects the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time-saving state in step S1684, and proceeds to step S1685. move on.

In step S1685, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like to determine whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1686, the game control microcomputer 101 selects a jackpot in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in step S1681, S1683, or S1684. The associated special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is selected and the process proceeds to step S1693. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special pattern 2 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, that is, it is a loss, it checks the symbol type flag etc. in step S1687, and confirms the special pattern 2 loss symbol type determination result. It is determined whether it is a losing symbol D or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination result is the losing symbol D, it performs reach determination in step S1688. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b, and uses that reach random number as the current gaming state (non-time saving). It is determined whether there is a reach or there is no reach by comparing it with a reach determination table according to the state (state/time saving state).

In step S1689, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the result of the reach determination is "with reach". If the result of the reach determination is that there is a reach, the game control microcomputer 101 associates it with the losing symbol D in the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table selected in step S1681, S1683, or S1684 in step S1690. The selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table with reach is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1693. On the other hand, if the result of the reach determination is that there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current number of reserved special symbols 2 in step S1691, and selects the special symbol selected in any one of steps S1681, S1683, and S1684. Among the 2 variation pattern determination tables, a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no reach that is associated with the losing symbol D and corresponds to the number of reserved special figure 2 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1693.

Furthermore, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1687 that the result of the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination is not the losing symbol D, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1692 with the special figure selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, and S1684. Among the 2 variation pattern determination tables, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the losing symbol E is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1693.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in steps S1686, S1690, S1691, and S1692, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 2 variation pattern based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in step S1693. I do. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, and selects the special figure variation pattern. The pattern random number is compared with the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure 2 variation pattern.

Subsequently, in step S1694, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern in the output buffer, and in step S1695, sets the special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, special symbol confirmation processing according to the seventh embodiment will be explained. The special symbol confirmation process according to the seventh embodiment is almost the same as the special symbol confirmation process according to the sixth embodiment. The difference is that in the sixth embodiment, it is determined in step S1764 shown in FIG. 86 whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol E or a losing symbol F, but in the seventh embodiment. In this case, since the losing symbol F is not provided, it is determined whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is the losing symbol E or not. Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the symbol E is a losing symbol, it changes the special operation status to "8" in step S1766 and ends the special symbol confirmation process, while determining that the symbol E is not a losing symbol. If determined, the special operation status is changed to "1" in step S1765, and the special symbol confirmation process is ended.

Next, the game state setting process after losing symbol display (S1509) according to the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 93 shows a flowchart of the game state setting process after displaying losing symbols according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, in the game state setting process after displaying a losing symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1801 that the game state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is currently in the non-time saving state. Determine whether it exists or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game is in a non-time saving state, it selects the game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display in step S1802, and proceeds to step S1805.

If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1801 that the game is not in a non-time-saving state, that is, in a time-saving state, it determines in step S1803 whether or not the gaming state related to the jackpot determination probability is a normal probability state. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game is in the normal probability state, in step S1804, it selects the game state setting table for low probability time saving loss symbol stop display, and proceeds to step S1805. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not in the normal probability state, it proceeds to step S1809.

In step S1805, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state according to the gaming state setting table selected in step S1802 or step S1804. Specifically, when the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display is selected, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E. A game in which the time saving flag (after losing symbol E is displayed) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and also indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non-time saving state. A status command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. On the other hand, when the gaming state setting table for low probability time-saving losing symbol stop display is selected, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a time-saving flag (losing symbol) indicating that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E. After symbol E is displayed, the time-saving flag) is turned ON in the time-saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time-saving state, and to indicate that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state. A gaming state command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Next, in step S1806, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines the prescribed number of time reductions according to the gaming state setting table selected in step S1802 or step S1804, that is, the prescribed number of time reductions associated with the losing symbols in the current gaming state. Add to the continuous time reduction counter. The continuous time reduction counter counts the number of consecutive time reductions and is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. Here, the number of continuous time reductions will be explained.

As mentioned above, in the seventh embodiment, even if the losing symbol E is stopped and displayed in the low probability high base game state, the time saving state has already been set, and the non-time saving state is changed once like before the execution of the jackpot game. Since it is not returned to (reset), the game state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 is not changed and the time saving state continues as it is. When the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed in the low probability high base game state, not only the time saving state simply continues, but the remaining number of time saving times increases by the prescribed number of time saving times associated with the losing symbol. do. That is, the remaining number of times of time saving is added (the duration of the time saving state is extended).

In this way, when the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed in a low probability high base game state, the remaining number of time savers is added (the duration of the time saver state is extended), but it is continuously executed for one time saver state. An upper limit value is set for the number of times that the special figure variable display can be performed. The number of times the special figure variable display can be executed continuously is referred to as the "continuous time saving number", and its upper limit is referred to as the "time saving limiter number". Therefore, if the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed in the non-time saving state, a new time saving state will be set, but the initial remaining number of time savings related to this time saving state is the same as the losing symbol E in the non-time saving state. The specified number of time reductions corresponding to the stop display of E is "80 times", and this "80 times" becomes the first continuous time reduction number.

Then, when the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed in the time saving state (low probability high base gaming state), the prescribed number of time saving times corresponding to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state is "40 times". is added, so the number of consecutive time reductions is "120". In addition, for example, if the special symbol variable display has been executed 20 times before the stop display of the losing symbol E in the time saving state is performed, the remaining number of time saving at that time is 60 times (80 times - 20 times). Therefore, if ``40 times'' are added, the remaining number of time-saving times will be 100 times, but originally the time-saving state could continue until the special figure variable display was executed 80 times, but ``40 times'' remains. The number of executions of the special figure variable display that can be executed continuously in the time-saving state (continuous time-saving number) is 120 times (80 times + 40 times), including the number of times that have already been executed. Become.

The explanation returns to the game state setting process after the losing symbol is displayed. In step S1807, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the number of consecutive time reductions is equal to or less than the number of time reduction limiters (200 times). If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of consecutive time saving times is equal to or less than the time saving limiter number (200 times), in step S1808, it corresponds to the losing symbol in the current gaming state (non-time saving state/low probability high base gaming state). The prescribed number of times saved is added to the counter value of the remaining time saved number counter, and in step S1809, the special operation status is changed to "1", and the game state setting process after displaying the losing symbol is ended.

In addition, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of continuous time reductions is not less than the number of time reduction limiters (200 times), that is, the number of continuous time reductions exceeds the number of time reduction limiters, the game control microcomputer 101 directly sets the special operation status to "1" in step S1809. After changing the losing symbol, the game state setting process is completed after displaying the losing symbol.

Next, characteristic parts of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment described based on FIG. 63 and parts common to the game flow according to the sixth embodiment described based on FIG. 87 will be omitted. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in response to the start of the special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state, the normal effect mode that had been set up until then shifts to the special effect mode. The content of the performance in the special performance mode is the same as in the sixth embodiment.

When the special figure 2 variable display is executed in the normal gaming state and the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed while the special effect mode is being executed, the prescribed number of times for time reduction is 80 times according to the stop display. Then, a time-saving state in which the losing symbol E time-saving state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used is set, and the game shifts to a low-probability, high-base game state, and at the same time, shifts to a super chance mode. Then, when the game is executed in the low probability high base gaming state and the performance is executed in the super chance mode, the stop display of the losing symbol E is displayed as the final result display of the special symbol 2 variable display. When executed, it corresponds to the stop display of losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state as long as the number of consecutive time saving times does not exceed the time saving limiter number while maintaining the low probability high base gaming state and the super chance mode. The specified number of time savings (40 times) will be added to the remaining number of time savings. After that, when the game is executed in the low probability high base game state and the performance is executed in the super chance mode time saving performance mode, when the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed, the number of consecutive time saving times becomes the time saving limiter. Until the number of times is reached, the low probability high base gaming state and the super chance mode are maintained, while the time saving specified number of times (40 times) associated with the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state, The remaining number of time savings will be added. On the other hand, when the game is executed in the low probability high base gaming state and the production is executed in the super chance mode time-saving production mode, the final result display of the special figure 2 variable display is the losing symbol E. Even if the stop display is performed, the continuous time saver number with the time saver specified number (40 times) associated with the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base game state and the remaining time saver number added will be the time saver limiter number. If it exceeds, the low probability high base gaming state and the super chance mode will be maintained, but the remaining number of time savings will not be added.

In addition, the prescribed number of time-savings associated with the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low-probability, low-base gaming state is 80 times, and the prescribed number of time-savings associated with the stopping display of the losing symbol E in the low-probability, high-base gaming state is 80 times. is 40 times, and the time saving limiter number is 200 times, so in the low probability high base gaming state, the losing symbol E is stopped and displayed 3 times in a row in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability low base gaming state. If the number of times of continuous time saving is exceeded, the number of times of continuous time saving will reach the number of times of time saving limiter. That is, it is possible to add the remaining time saving number of times to the number of executions of the special figure variable display "40 times" up to three times.

In addition, in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol C in the special figure 1 variable display, or the stop display of the jackpot symbol F in the special figure 2 variable display, the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot game ends. When the player moves to the low-probability, high-base gaming state and also shifts to the time-saving performance mode, the game is executed in the low-probability, high-base gaming state, and the performance is executed in the super chance mode. When the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed, the low probability high base gaming state is maintained while the low probability high base gaming state and the time saving production mode are maintained within the range where the number of consecutive time saving times does not exceed the time saving limiter number of times. The remaining number of time savings is added by the prescribed number of time savings (40 times) associated with the stop display of the losing symbol E in . However, since the specified time saving count associated with the time saving state related to jackpot symbol C and jackpot symbol F is 120 times, and the time saving limiter number is 200 times, the jackpot game related to jackpot symbol C and jackpot symbol F ends. In the low probability high base game state corresponding to , when the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed twice, the number of consecutive time saving times reaches the time saving limiter number. That is, it is possible to add the remaining time saving number of times to the number of executions of the special figure variable display "40 times" up to two times.

In the seventh embodiment, the game is executed in a high probability high base gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state, and the performance is executed in the probability variable performance mode. Even if the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed while the winning symbol is in progress, the remaining number of time savings will not be added.

Next, the effects related to the addition of the remaining number of shortened hours will be explained. In the seventh embodiment, the effect related to the addition of the remaining number of time savings is performed on the display unit 50a. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a state in which an effect related to the addition of the remaining number of time savings is executed on the display unit 50a. Here, a description will be given of the performance related to the addition of the remaining number of time-savings performed in the super chance mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 95(A), in the super chance mode, the super chance mode background image G140 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the special figure variable production (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3) corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display is displayed. It is assumed that the remaining number of time savings is 51, and the remaining time saving number image G31 indicating that the remaining number of time savings is 51 is displayed. It is assumed that the stop display of the losing symbol E is executed in the special figure 2 variable display. Then, first, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. Subsequently, in response to the start of the next special pattern 2 variable display after the special pattern confirmation time has passed since the stop display of the losing pattern E was executed, the variable display of new production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 starts. However, after the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed, a gaming state command indicating that the game is in a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state mentioned above is transmitted from the microcomputer 101 for game control. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 starts the variable display of the new performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, that is, when trying to switch from the stopped display to the variable display of the new performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, ), an image G34 suggesting that the remaining number of time savings will be added (remaining number of time savings added image) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The remaining time saving number addition image G34 is composed of an image including characters "+40 times" indicating that the remaining number of time saving times will be added (added) by 40 times.

Immediately after the remaining time saving number addition image G34 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 95(D), the display content of the remaining time saving number image G31 is changed in accordance with the addition of the remaining time saving number of times. Specifically, the remaining number of time savings has been added 40 times, and the remaining number of time savings has become 91, so the number part related to the remaining number of time savings image G31 becomes "91". Immediately thereafter, in response to the start of a new special figure 2 variable display, the number part related to the remaining time saving number image G31 is subtracted by "1" and becomes "90", as shown in FIG. 95(E). becomes. In this way, displaying the additional time saving remaining number image G34 and changing the display content of the remaining time saving number image G31 in response to the addition of the remaining time saving number constitutes an effect related to the addition of the remaining time saving number. do. In addition, below, the performance related to the addition of the remaining number of time savings will be referred to as the "additional performance of the remaining number of time savings".

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment, when the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state), the time saving state is set according to the stop display. Further, when a stop display of a losing symbol E is performed in a low probability high base game state, the remaining number of time savings related to the time saving state is added according to the stop display, and the duration of the time saving state is extended. Therefore, even if players cannot win a jackpot in the time-saving state, they can create a sense of expectation that something advantageous will happen, such as adding up the remaining number of time-savings (extending the duration of the time-saving state), and increase their interest in the game. can be improved.

In addition, for the same losing symbol E, the prescribed number of time-saving states related to the time-saving state according to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non-time-saving state (low probability low base gaming state) is 80 times, and the time-saving state (low probability low base gaming state) The prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the high base gaming state is 40 times, and the prescribed number of time saving times differs depending on the gaming state. Therefore, the overall gameplay becomes more interesting and the game becomes more interesting.

Furthermore, if the stop display of the losing symbol E is executed in the time saving state, the remaining number of time saving times may be added, but since the time saving limiter number is set as the upper limit of the number of consecutive time saving times, the player may You can prevent it from becoming an advantage. In addition, the time-saving limiter count is set to be greater than the specified time-saving count in the low-probability, high-base gaming state, which is set in response to the end of the jackpot game, so even though the jackpot game is not being executed, the player is given a chance to lose. It is possible to give pleasure to the user for shifting to the time saving state in response to the stop display of the symbol E.

(Example of modification of seventh embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. Note that modifications of the first embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the like can also be applied to the seventh embodiment as appropriate within a consistent range (a range where consistency can be achieved). In the seventh embodiment, the special figure 2 losing symbol type that causes the time saving state is one type of losing symbol E, but there may be two or more types. In this case, the predetermined number of times of time saving, in other words, the number of times of execution of the added special symbol variable display may be made to differ depending on the type of losing symbol.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, even in the low probability high base game state that is set according to the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbols C and F, when the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed, the time saving remaining number of times is added. However, in the game state, even if the losing symbol E is stopped and displayed, it may be regulated so that the remaining number of time savings is not added. Alternatively, instead of restricting the time saving remaining number of times from being added, the low probability high base gaming state that is set according to the end of the jackpot game related to jackpot symbols C and F can be set according to the stop display of losing symbol E. It may be regulated so that the number of executions of the additional special figure variable display is smaller than the low probability high base game state set.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, there is no prescribed number of time saving times for the high probability high base game state that is set according to the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbols A, B, D, and E, and the game state is Even if the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed, the time saving remaining number of times is not added, but a specified time saving number is set for the relevant gaming state, and the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed in the relevant gaming state. If the time limit is exceeded, the remaining number of time savings may be added. In this case, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display that is added by one stop display of the losing symbol E is higher than in the case of the low probability high base game state set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E. It may be made smaller.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the remaining number of time savings is added, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are about to switch from the static display to the variable display, the remaining number of time savings is added, and the special feature to be added is added. A time-saving remaining number addition effect indicating the number of execution times of the variable diagram display is executed, but the specific content and execution timing of this effect may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, for example, in the special figure variation performance, a performance suggesting that the remaining number of time savings may be added, in other words, a performance that incites whether or not the remaining number of time savings will be added may be performed. In this case, for example, in the special symbol variation performance related to the losing symbol E, a performance is performed to incite whether or not the remaining time saving number will be added, and in the said performance, the remaining time saving number will finally be added, and Indicates the number of times the special figure variable display will be executed. On the other hand, in a special symbol fluctuation performance related to a loss that corresponds to a special symbol fluctuation performance related to a loss pattern E, a performance that incites whether or not the remaining time saving number will be added is executed, and in this performance, the final time reduction remaining Indicates that the number of times will not be added.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 (easy to open) related to the time saving state that is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non-time saving state (low probability low base gaming state). ), and the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 related to the time saving state (after adding the remaining number of time saving), which is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the time saving state (low probability high base game state). (ease of opening) are the same, but may be different. For example, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the time saving state that is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state) is 3.0 seconds, and the normal The figure fluctuation time is 10.0 seconds, the winning probability is 30000/65536, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the time saving state (low probability high base gaming state) is 5.0 seconds. is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the time saving state (low probability high base gaming state) so that the normal symbol fluctuation time is 5.0 seconds and the winning probability is 59936/65536. The ease of opening of the second starting port 12 (ease of opening) related to the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state). The opening ease (ease of opening) of the second starting port 12 may be higher. By doing this, the overall gameplay becomes more interesting and the game becomes more interesting.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, the game board unit YU shown in FIG. 2 is used as in the first embodiment. That is, basically, in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 12 is opened and a winning is made to the second starting port 12, and the special figure 2 variable display is not executed. Below, as the eighth embodiment, the basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the eighth embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, "small hit" is provided as a judgment result of the special figure 1 jackpot judgment, and when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop display is A time-saving state may be set depending on the situation. However, in the eighth embodiment, two types of small winning symbols are provided, and when one of the small winning symbols is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is set according to the stopped display, as in the first embodiment. Immediately after that, a small winning game is executed, but when the other small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, first a small winning game is executed according to the stop display, and then a time saving state is executed according to the end of the small winning game. is set.

In the eighth embodiment, a small winning pattern A and a small winning pattern B are provided as small winning pattern types. Therefore, as in the case of a jackpot or a loss, if the result of the jackpot determination is a small win, a special figure 1 small win symbol type determination is performed to determine the small win symbol type. The special figure 1 small winning symbol type determination is performed by the game control microcomputer 101. The game control microcomputer 101 performs loss symbol type determination based on the small winning symbol type determination table.

FIG. 96 shows an example of the structure of the small winning symbol type determination table. The small winning symbol type determination table is configured similarly to the jackpot symbol type determining table and the losing symbol type determining table. Specifically, the small winning symbol type determination table sets the determination value of the random number of the symbol type (symbol type random number determination value) for each small winning symbol type so that the selection rate for each small winning symbol type shown in FIG. 96 is obtained. are appropriately distributed and structured.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs in processing content from the first embodiment, will be described. Processes that are different from the first embodiment are the special operation process, the special symbol 1 determination process of the special symbol standby process in the special operation process, and the special symbol confirmation process in the special operation process.

First, the special figure 1 determination process according to the eighth embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process according to the eighth embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, in the special figure 1 determination process according to the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that it is a small hit in step S1630, the special figure 1 small win is determined in step S1631 as in the case of a jackpot or a loss. The symbol type determination table is selected, and in step S1632, the special symbol 1 small hit symbol type determination is performed.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a to determine the special figure 1 small winning symbol type. It is checked against the winning symbol type determination table to determine which small winning symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 1 small winning symbol type determination, in step S1633, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the small winning symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1634. At this point, a symbol designation command indicating the small winning symbol type which is the determination result is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination processing is completed, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

Note that some of the step numbers in the special figure 1 determination process shown in FIG. 97 are different from the step numbers in the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 55, but the processing contents related to the special figure 1 determination process The processing other than the processing after determining that it is a small win in step S1630 is the same as the first embodiment.

Next, special symbol confirmation processing according to the eighth embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the eighth embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98, in the special symbol confirmation process according to the eighth embodiment, if it is determined in step S1762 that the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the small winning symbol that is being stopped and displayed is determined in step S1763. It is determined whether the symbol is a small winning symbol A or not. Here, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small winning symbol A, it changes the special operation status to "6" in step S1764 and finishes the special symbol confirmation process. That is, if it is determined that it is the small winning symbol B, the special operation status is changed to "9" in step S1765, and the special symbol confirmation process is ended. As will be described later, when the special operation status is "6", processing is performed to set the time saving state according to the stop display of the corresponding small winning symbol, while when the special operation status is "9", the processing for setting the time saving state is performed according to the stop display of the corresponding small winning symbol. Processing for executing a small winning game is performed in response to the stop display of winning symbols.

Although some of the step numbers in the special symbol confirmation process shown in FIG. 98 are different from the step numbers in the special symbol confirmation process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the processing contents related to the special symbol confirmation process are as follows. The processing other than the processing after determining that the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in step S1762 is the same as the first embodiment.

Next, special operation processing according to the eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 99 shows a flowchart of special operation processing according to the eighth embodiment. In the special operation process according to the eighth embodiment, the process regarding the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big winning device 14D is divided into 10 statuses (stages). "Special operation status=1 to 10" is assigned to each of these statuses. As shown in FIG. 99, the special operation process according to the eighth embodiment is a game state setting process after displaying the first small winning symbol of special operation status = 6, which was not included in the special operation status in the first embodiment. (S1507), and the first small winning game control process with special operation status = 7 (S1508), and the second small winning game control process with special operation status = 9 (S1510), and the second small winning game control process with special operation status = 10. A game state setting process (S1511) after winning symbols are displayed is included.

In the first small winning symbol display game state setting process (S1507) and the first small winning game control process (S1508), the first small winning symbol post display game state setting process (S1507) and the small winning game control process The same process as (S1508) is performed. That is, in the eighth embodiment, the name of the small winning symbol post-display gaming state setting process (S1507) and the small winning game control process (S1508) of the first embodiment is "1st small winning symbol post display gaming state setting process (S1508)". S1507)" and "first small winning game control process (S1508)."

In the second small winning game control process (S1510) and the game state setting process after second small winning symbol display (S1511), basically the small winning game control process (S1508) and the small winning symbol display of the first embodiment are performed. The same process as the post-game state setting process (S1507) is performed, but at the end of the second small win game control process (S1510), the special operation status is changed to "10" and the second small win game control process is finished. , is different from the first embodiment in that the special operation status is changed to "1" at the end of the game state setting process after displaying the second small winning symbol (S1511) and the game state setting process after displaying the second small winning symbol is ended. The processing contents are different from the small winning game control process (S1508) and the small winning symbol display game state setting process (S1507).

In the eighth embodiment, the small winning game when the small winning pattern A is stopped and displayed is the same as the small winning game when the small winning pattern B is stopped and displayed. In other words, the small winning game component related to the small winning game when the small winning pattern A is stopped and displayed, and the small winning game component related to the small winning game when the small winning pattern B is stopped and displayed. and are the same. Further, the time saving state when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed is the same as the time saving state when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed. In other words, the time-saving state components related to the time-saving state when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed are the same as the time-saving state components related to the time-saving state when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed. It is.

Next, the variable display of the small winning symbol B and the performance when a small winning game related to the small winning symbol B is executed will be explained. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a challenge effect is executed when the small winning symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a super chance is created when the small winning symbols stop displaying. mode.

FIG. 100(A) shows a presentation in which the challenge presentation ends on the display unit 50a in the normal presentation mode, suggesting a small hit and the loss of the losing symbol B, and also indicating that the super chance mode is set. FIG. 100(B) is a diagram showing how the stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is being executed, and FIG. 100(C) is a diagram showing the state immediately before the special symbol variation effect in the super chance mode is started, and FIG. 100(D) is a diagram showing the state in which the special symbol variable effect in the super chance mode is being performed. be.

As shown in FIG. 100(A), when the challenge effect is being executed in the special figure variation effect, when the special figure variation display related to the small winning symbol B ends, it suggests a small hit and a loss of the losing symbol B. At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting that the super chance mode is set. That is, a left super chance mode suggestion image G32a, a middle super chance mode suggestion image G32b, and a right super chance mode suggestion image G32c are displayed. Subsequently, at the timing when the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a left super chance mode suggestion image G32a, a middle super chance mode suggestion image G32b, and a right super chance mode suggestion image G32c are displayed. At the same time, the background image G116 for challenge effect is switched to the background image G140 for super chance mode, and the right-handed hit image G30 is displayed.

Then, in response to the end of the small winning game, a time saving state is set and a transition is made to a low probability high base game state, but here, as shown in FIG. , a remaining time saving number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. Subsequently, when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown decreases by "1".

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, it is difficult to obtain prize balls compared to jackpot games, and small win games that cannot generate a high probability state end. Since the time is accordingly shortened, the player can have a sense of expectation for the stop display of the small winning symbols, and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, there are multiple types of small winning symbols, and when small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed, a small winning game is executed first, and a time saving state is set according to the end of the small winning game. On the other hand, when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed, a time saving state is set in accordance with the stopping display, but as soon as the time saving state is set, the small winning game is executed. That is, in the case of small winning symbol A, the game is executed in a time-saving state even during the small winning game, whereas in the case of small winning symbol B, the game is executed in a non-time saving state during the small winning game. . In the small winning game, the large winning opening 14 is opened, so when the small winning game is being executed, a right hit is made, but the second start opening 12 can be opened by winning the gate 13. Here, in the case of the small winning symbol A, the game is executed in a time-saving state even during the small winning game, so compared to the case of the small winning symbol B, special drawing 2 reservation is more likely to occur, which is advantageous to the player. . In this way, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the next special figure 2 variable display is performed after the small winning game is executed, but depending on the type of small winning symbol, the special figure 2 during the small winning game Since the ease with which reservation occurs is different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the type of small winning symbols, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Example of modification of the eighth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, there are two kinds of special symbols 1 small winning symbols that cause the time saving state, small winning symbols A and B, but there may be three or more kinds. Furthermore, in addition to the special pattern 1-small winning symbol type that causes a time-saving state, it is also possible to provide a special pattern 1-small winning pattern type that does not cause a time-saving state. In this case, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state is executed and the small winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol is executed, the game state is not changed and the small winning symbol is The gaming state when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed continues as it is during the small winning game and after the small winning game. Therefore, for example, when the stop display of a special figure 1 small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state in a non-time saving state is executed, during the small winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol and after the small winning game, The non-time saving state at the time of the stop display continues as it is. In addition, when the stop display of a special figure 1 small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state is executed in the time saving state, the stop display will be displayed during the small winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol and also after the small winning game. The shortened time period will continue as it is. It should be noted that, with respect to the game state related to the probability of winning a jackpot, neither the special pattern 1-small winning symbol that causes a time-saving state nor the special pattern 1-small winning symbol that does not cause a time-saving state have no influence. In other words, in the normal probability state, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning symbol that causes the time saving state is executed, the corresponding small winning symbol will be displayed during the small winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol and even after the small winning game. The normal probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is. In addition, in the normal probability state, if the stop display of a special figure 1 small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state is executed, the corresponding small winning symbol will be displayed during the small winning game according to the small winning symbol and after the said small winning game. The normal probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is. On the other hand, in a high probability state, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning symbol that causes a time saving state is executed, the corresponding small winning symbol will be displayed during the small winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol and even after the said small winning game. The high probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is. In addition, in a high probability state, when the stop display of a special figure 1 small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state is executed, the corresponding small winning symbol will be displayed during the small winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol and after the said small winning game. The high probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the small winning game with the small winning symbol A and the small winning game with the small winning symbol B are configured to be the same, but they may be configured to be different. Furthermore, the time saving state related to the small winning pattern A and the time saving state related to the small winning pattern B are configured the same, but the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 (ease of opening: in the auxiliary game The opening time of the second starting port 12, the regular figure fluctuation time, the winning probability) and the specified number of time saving times may be configured to be different.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the time saving state that is set after the small winning game or before the small winning game, and the time saving state that is set after the jackpot game are based on the ease of opening the second starting port 12. Although they are configured the same, that is, a time-saving state component related to a time-saving state that is set after a small winning game or before a small winning game, and a time-saving state component related to a time-saving state that is set after a jackpot game. are the same, but may be configured differently.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, even when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed, and even when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed, the same challenge effect is performed and the same left super chance Mode suggestion image G32a, middle super chance mode suggestion image G32b, and right super chance mode suggestion image G32c are displayed, but when small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed, small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed. Depending on the case, the presentation mode (color, size, or display position) of these presentations may be made different so that it can be easily distinguished which small winning symbol type it is. In addition, the performance contents during the small winning game are made different depending on whether the small winning symbol A is displayed in a stopped state or the small winning symbol B is displayed in a stopped state, so that it is easy to easily select which of the small winning symbol types. It may be possible to make it possible to distinguish between the two.

7. Other Modification Examples Next, other modification examples of the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described below. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machines PY1 according to the basic embodiment and the first to eighth embodiments will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machines PY1, etc.".

In pachinko gaming machines such as PY1, the display section 50a is used to variably display the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the special drawing results, but instead of the image display device, a so-called "spinning drum type gaming machine" is used. (Slot machine)" A drum with a symbol displayed thereon may be provided, and the drum may be variably displayed to notify the result of the special drawing lottery. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 and the like, the grand prize opening 14 can be opened in a jackpot game, but a winning area other than the grand prize opening 14 that can be opened in a jackpot game may be provided.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 and the like, when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions for the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which a game ball can enter when opened is provided at a position in the gaming area 6 that can be reached by the game ball. When the second big winning device opens in a predetermined round game and the game ball that enters the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side, a high probability state occurs as the jackpot game ends. may be set.

In this case, for example, the second jackpot device releases a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) for a time when it is easy to enter the ball (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second jackpot device A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set a high probability state) that is released for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game ball can pass through the second grand prize winning device, and a sorting device is provided for distributing the game ball to the specific area and the non-specific area. Although the opening time of the second grand prize device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second grand prize device and the operation mode of the sorting device creates a jackpot pattern and a high probability state that make it easy to set a high probability state. It is also possible to provide jackpot symbols that are difficult to set.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, etc., the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the performance according to the progress of the game (game control). 120, game control and performance control are performed by different boards, but they may be configured to be performed by one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that one board, or may be provided separately from that one board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to other pinball gaming machines such as arranged ball machines and mahjong ball gaming machines, and to reel-type gaming machines (so-called "slot machines").

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to J are disclosed up to the previous paragraph in this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the descriptions of Inventions A to Invention J, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the invention described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A4, invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B2, and invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C2, Invention D is a generic term for the following inventions D1 to Invention D3, Invention E is a generic term for the following inventions E1 to Invention E3, Invention F is a generic term for the following inventions F1 to Invention F2, and Invention G is a generic term for the following inventions F1 to Invention F2. is a generic term for inventions G1 to G3 below, invention H is a generic term for inventions H1 to H4 below, invention I is a generic term for inventions I1 to I4 below, and invention J is a generic term for inventions I1 to I4 below. This is a general term for the following inventions J1 to J3.

8-1-1. Invention A1
It is equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game that involves opening a variable prize opening (big prize opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in a gaming area (gaming area 6) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In gaming machines,
The predetermined condition includes that a game ball enters a variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area,
The game control means is
It is possible to set a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the variable starting port is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific gaming state may be entered without executing the jackpot game.

8-1-2. Invention A2
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
The game control means is
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special design),
The predetermined conditions include stopping and displaying specific identification information (jackpot symbol) in the variable display of the identification information,
After stopping and displaying the specific identification information, executing the jackpot game,
In the variable display of the identification information, if non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific gaming state is changed without executing the jackpot game. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-1-3. Invention A3
A gaming machine according to invention A2,
The game control means is
Before displaying the variation of the identification information, a determination is made as to whether or not the specific gaming state can be entered (loss symbol type determination), and when it is determined that the specific gaming state can be entered through the determination. A gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific identification information can be displayed in a static manner while the identification information is displayed in a variable manner.

8-1-4. Invention A4
A gaming machine according to invention A3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control means may enter the specific game state after executing the jackpot game.

8-2-1. Invention B1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when the specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable prize opening (which can be opened and closed) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6) is activated. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game with opening of the big prize opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the openable/closable variable starting port (second starting port 12) provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
In the variable display of the identification information, if non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific gaming state is changed without executing the jackpot game. There are times when
The variation time (special figure variation time) related to the variation display of the identification information is determined based on different conditions (variation pattern determination table) in the case of the normal gaming state and the case of the specific gaming state. A gaming machine.

8-2-2. Invention B2
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The non-specific identification information includes at least first non-specific identification information (loss pattern B) and second non-specific identification information (loss pattern C),
The game control means is different between the specific gaming state after stopping and displaying the first non-specific identification information and the specific gaming state after stopping and displaying the second non-specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time is determined based on conditions (special figure fluctuation pattern determination table).

8-3-1. Invention C1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when the specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable prize opening (which can be opened and closed) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6) is activated. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game with opening of the big prize opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the openable/closable variable starting port (second starting port 12) provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
In the variable display of the identification information, if non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific gaming state is changed without executing the jackpot game. There are times when
The non-specific identification information includes at least first non-specific identification information (loss pattern B) and second non-specific identification information (loss pattern C),
The specific gaming state (second time saving state) after the first non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, and the specific gaming state (third time saving state) after the second non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, is a gaming machine characterized by different things.

8-3-2. Invention C2
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The game control means is different between the specific gaming state after stopping and displaying the first non-specific identification information and the specific gaming state after stopping and displaying the second non-specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that a variation time related to a variation display of the identification information is determined based on a condition (a special figure variation pattern determination table).

8-4-1. Invention D1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when the specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable prize opening (which can be opened and closed) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6) is activated. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means that executes a jackpot game (game control microcomputer 101) that involves opening the big prize opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the openable/closable variable starting port (second starting port 12) provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
When entering the specific game state after executing the jackpot game, and non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information in the fluctuation display of the identification information. After the stop display, there are cases where the specific game state is entered without executing the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific gaming state when the jackpot game is executed is different from the specific gaming state when the jackpot game is not executed.

8-4-2. Invention D2
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the ease with which the variable start opening is opened is different between the specific gaming state when the jackpot game is executed and the specific gaming state when the jackpot game is not executed. .

8-4-3. Invention D3
A gaming machine according to invention D1 or invention D2,
The game control means determines the specific game state when the jackpot game is executed and the specific game state when the jackpot game is not executed based on different conditions (special figure fluctuation pattern determination table). , a gaming machine characterized in that a fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of the identification information is determined.

8-5-1. Invention E1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when the specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable prize opening (which can be opened and closed) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6) is activated. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game with opening of the big prize opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the openable/closable variable starting port (second starting port 12) provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
In the case where the specific game state is set in accordance with the end of the jackpot game, and when the non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is displayed in the fluctuation display of the identification information, There are cases where the specific gaming state is set according to the stop display, and
Different conditions (special figure fluctuation pattern determination table) are used when the specific gaming state is entered in response to the end of the jackpot game and in the case where the specific gaming state is entered in response to the stop display of the non-specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the variation time related to the variation display of the identification information is determined based on the variation display of the identification information.

8-5-2. Invention E2
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
The non-specific identification information includes at least first non-specific identification information and second non-specific identification information,
The game control means sets the specific gaming state in response to the stop display of the first non-specific identification information and the specific gaming state in response to the stop display of the second non-specific identification information. , a gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time is determined based on the same conditions (fluctuation pattern determination table).

8-5-3. Invention E3
A gaming machine according to invention E1 or invention E2,
A condition for ending the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state is entered in response to the stop display of the first non-specific identification information, and a condition for ending the specific gaming state in response to the stop display of the second non-specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the conditions for ending the specific gaming state (specified number of times of time reduction) are different when the specified gaming state is reached.

8-6-1. Invention F1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols) on the condition that the ball enters a starting port (first starting port 11, second starting port 12) provided in a gaming area (gaming area 6), and the above-mentioned variation When specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed on the display, a game control means (for game control) executes a jackpot game accompanied by opening of a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area. In a gaming machine equipped with a microcomputer 101),
The starting port includes a variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed,
The game control means is
The gaming state related to the ease of opening the variable starting port may be a non-specific state (non-time saving state) or a specific state (time saving state) in which the variable starting port is easier to open than the non-specific state. It is possible and
The gaming state related to the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display is a normal probability state, or a high probability state in which the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display is higher than the normal probability state. It is possible to make it into a stochastic state,
When in the normal probability state and the non-specific state, if non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the non-specific identification information changing the specific state to the specific state,
A game characterized in that when the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the high probability state and the non-specific state are present, the non-specific state is not changed to the specific state. Machine.

8-6-2. Invention F2
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display while in the high probability state and the non-specific state, the game control means controls the jackpot based on the stop display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific state may be changed to the specific state in response to the end of a game.

8-7-1. Invention G1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols) on the condition that the ball enters a starting port (first starting port 11, second starting port 12) provided in a gaming area (gaming area 6), and the above-mentioned variation When specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed on the display, a game control means (for game control) executes a jackpot game accompanied by opening of a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area. In a gaming machine equipped with a microcomputer 101),
The starting port includes a variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed,
The game control means is
The gaming state related to the ease of opening the variable starting port may be a non-specific state (non-specific state) or a specific state (time saving state) in which the variable starting port is easier to open than the non-specific state. It is possible and
The gaming state related to the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display is a normal probability state, or a high probability state in which the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display is higher than the normal probability state. It is possible to make it into a stochastic state,
When in the normal probability state and the non-specific state, if non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the non-specific identification information changing the specific state to the specific state,
A game characterized in that, when the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the high probability state and the non-specific state are present, the non-specific state is changed to the specific state. Machine.

8-7-2. Invention G2
A gaming machine according to invention G2,
Conditions for terminating the specific state when the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed when the normal probability state and the non-specific state are in the high probability state and the non-specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that the conditions for terminating the specific state when the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed are different.

8-7-3. Invention G3
A gaming machine according to invention G1 or invention G2,
The game control means changes the high probability state to the normal probability state when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the game is in the high probability state and the non-specific state. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-8-1. Invention H1
Fluctuation display of identification information (special symbols) can be executed on the condition that the game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 11, second starting port 12) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6). and when specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, a game control that executes a jackpot game accompanied by opening of a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area. In a game machine equipped with means (game control microcomputer 101),
The starting port includes a first starting port that does not open and close, and a second starting port that can open and close,
The game control means is
It is possible to put the second starting port into a specific state (time-saving state) in which it is easier to open than a normal state (non-time-saving state),
In the normal state, when non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C, loss pattern E, loss pattern F) is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information, the specific state west,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the specific state, the specific state continues even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed while the identification information is displayed in a variable manner.

8-8-2. Invention H2
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
The game control means is
In the normal state, when the non-specific identification information (loss pattern E, loss pattern F) is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port, the state is changed to the specific state,
In the specific state, the specific state is continued even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port. .

8-8-3. Invention H3
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
The game control means is
In the normal state, when the non-specific identification information (loss pattern B, loss pattern C) is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port, the system enters the specific state,
In the specific state, the specific state is continued even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port. .

8-8-4. Invention H4
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions H1 to H3,
When the specific state is entered in response to the stop display of the non-specific identification information, the specific state can be continued until a predetermined end condition (the specified number of time saving times "150 times", "50 times") is satisfied. can be,
Even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific state that can continue until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the specific state is continued without changing the predetermined termination condition. A gaming machine.

8-9-1. Invention I1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when the specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable prize opening (which can be opened and closed) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6) is activated. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game with opening of the big prize opening 14),
The game control means is
The variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area can be put into a specific state (time saving state) that is easier to open than the normal state (non-time saving state),
In the normal state, when non-specific identification information (losing pattern E) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the identification information, for a predetermined duration (time saving specified number of times "80"), the It is possible to put it in a specific state,
In the specified state, when the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed while the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the duration period is extended.

8-9-2. Invention I2
A gaming machine according to invention I1,
The initial duration of the specific state based on the fact that the non-specific identification information was stopped and displayed in the normal state (the specified number of time reductions is "80 times"), and the non-specific identification information stopped in the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that the period of time extended based on what is displayed (the prescribed number of times of time reduction "40 times") is different.

8-9-3. Invention I3
A gaming machine according to invention I2,
An upper limit value (time saving limiter number of times “200”) is set for the duration,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means changes from the specific state to the non-specific state when the duration reaches the upper limit value.

8-9-4. Invention I4
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions I3,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state, the game control means maintains the specific state for a predetermined period in response to the execution of the jackpot game based on the stopped display of the specific identification information. It is possible to
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is shorter than the continuation period in which the upper limit value is reached.

8-10-1. Invention J1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when the specific identification information (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable prize opening (which can be opened and closed) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6) is activated. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game with opening of the big prize opening 14),
The game control means is
In response to the end of the jackpot game, the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed may be set to a high probability state that is higher than the normal probability state,
In the variable display of the identification information, when non-specific identification information (small winning symbol) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, a small winning game with opening of the variable winning opening is executed, and the small winning game is A specific state (time-saving state) in which a variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed provided in the game area is easier to open in response to the end of the game, compared to a normal non-specific state (non-time-saving state). A gaming machine characterized by:

8-10-2. Invention J2
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
The non-specific identification information includes first non-specific identification information (small winning pattern B) and second non-specific identification information (small winning pattern A),
The game control means is
When the first non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific state is set after the small winning game is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific state is set before the small winning game is executed.

8-10-3. Invention J3
A gaming machine according to invention J1 or invention J2,
The game control means is
When predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information and the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information in the non-specific state, the small winning game is executed and the small winning game ends. The non-specific state is not changed to the specific state depending on the state.

PY1...Pachinko gaming machine 1...Game board 11...First starting port 11a...First starting port sensor 12...Second starting port 12a...Second starting port sensor 14...Big prize opening 14a...Big prize opening sensor 40...First Production button device 40k...First production button 40a...First production button sensor 41...Second production button device 41k...Second production button 41a...Second production button sensor 50...Image display device 50a...Display section 52...Speaker 53... Frame lamp 55... Board movable device 55k... Board movable body 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 140... Image control board

Claims (1)

A predetermined determination is made, and when a first result is derived from the predetermined determination, an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed, while a second result different from the first result is derived from the predetermined determination. and a game control means that does not execute the advantageous game,
Based on the result of the predetermined determination, it is possible to perform a variable display of the effect pattern on the display section, and when the first result is derived, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in the first result display mode, and the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in the first result display mode, and A gaming machine comprising: a performance control means that may stop displaying the performance symbols in a second result display mode when a second result is derived ;
The second result includes a second normal result and a second special result,
The game control means is
The predetermined determination can be performed on the condition that the game ball enters a starting area provided in the gaming area,
Regarding the ease of opening of the openable/closable variable starting area constituting the starting area, it is possible to create a second opening/closing game state in which the variable starting area is easier to open than the normal first opening/closing gaming state,
Regarding the probability that the first result is derived in the predetermined determination, it is possible to set a second probability game state in which the first result is more likely to be derived than a normal first probability game state,
When the second normal result is derived in the first open/close game state and the first probability game state, the first open/close game state is not changed to the second open/close game state; 2. When the special result is derived, the first open/close game state is changed to the second open/close game state,
If the second normal result is derived and the second special result is derived in the first open/close gaming state and the second probability gaming state, from the first open/close gaming state. without entering the second opening/closing gaming state;
The second result display mode includes a non-specific second result display mode that suggests that the first open/close gaming state does not change to the second open/close gaming state, and a non-specific second result display mode that indicates that the second open/close gaming state does not change from the first open/close gaming state to the second open/close gaming state. There is a specific second result display mode that suggests that
The performance control means is
The same production mode may be set in the case of the first open/closed gaming state and the first probability gaming state and the case of the first open/closed gaming state and the second probability gaming state,
When the second normal result is derived in the first open/close game state and the first probability game state in the same performance mode , the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-specific second result display mode. On the other hand, when the second special result is derived, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in the specific second result display mode,
When the second normal result is derived and when the second special result is derived in the first opening/closing gaming state and the second probability gaming state in the same production mode , the production pattern A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine stops displaying the following in the non-specific second result display mode.

Images